Relase Date: 2022. 10. / Manual Revision: 1.04
Multi-Way Switchgear Controller
ETR606
User's Manual
Copyright © 2021 by ENTEC ELECTRIC & ELECTRONIC CO., LTD all right reserved.
Forerunner Distribution & Automation
Multi-Way Switchgear Controller ETR606
Release Note
Release Note :
[September, 2021] Ver1.00
Multi-Way Switchgear Controller ETR606 User's manual is created.
[March, 2022] Ver1.01
Add “Automatic Load Transfer Switch (ALTS) Control” function
[June, 2022] Ver1.02
Add
“Negative
Sequence
Overcurrent”
function(C/B
type)
and
“Negative
Sequence Fault Indication” function(S/W type)
[September, 2022] Ver1.03
Add “Voltage Protection” and “Frequency Protection” function on C/B type.
[October, 2022] Ver1.04
Change “1. INTRODUCTION”.
ii
Multi-Way Switchgear Controller ETR606
Table of Contents
Release Note
ii
Table of contents
iii
Safety precautions
vi
1. INTRODUCTION ·········································································································· 1
1.1. Summary of Features ·········································································································· 2
2. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS ················································································ 6
2.1. Usage Condition ···················································································································· 6
2.2. Input & Output ······················································································································ 6
2.3. Type Withstand Tests ········································································································ 7
2.4. Communication Port ············································································································· 9
3. DIMENSIONS AND CONSTRUCTION ·································································· 10
3.1. ETR606-6 ····························································································································· 10
3.2. ETR606-4 ····························································································································· 11
4. SIDE PANEL CONSTRUCTION ·············································································· 12
4.1. Current Input Connector ·································································································· 12
4.2. Voltage Input Connector ·································································································· 14
4.3. Digital Output Connector ································································································· 15
4.3.1. Common Connector ··································································································· 15
4.3.2. Circuit Connector ······································································································· 16
4.4. Digital Input Connector ···································································································· 17
4.4.1. Common Connector ··································································································· 17
4.4.2. Circuit Connector ······································································································· 18
4.5. Power Input Connector ···································································································· 18
4.6. DC Input Connector ··········································································································· 19
4.7. Communication Port ········································································································ 20
4.7.1. RS232 Port ··················································································································· 20
4.7.2. RS485 Port ··················································································································· 20
4.7.3. Ethernet Port ··············································································································· 21
4.7.4. IRIG-B Connector - Option ··················································································· 21
5. USER INTERFACE PANEL ······················································································ 22
iii
Multi-Way Switchgear Controller ETR606
5.1. User defined LED Part ···································································································· 24
5.2. Common Control Part ······································································································· 25
5.3. Local Control Part ············································································································· 26
5.4. Open/Close Operation Part ····························································································· 26
5.5. Fault Indication Part ········································································································· 27
5.6. System & LCD Control Part ·························································································· 28
5.6.1. Communication Status Indication Part ································································ 29
5.6.2. Menu Control Part ····································································································· 29
5.6.3. Other Control Parts ··································································································· 30
6. LCD CONTROL MANUAL ························································································ 31
6.1. LCD Screen ·························································································································· 31
6.2. Control Keys ························································································································ 31
6.3. LCD Menu Structure Tree ······························································································ 32
6.3.1. Menu Tree Structure for Switch Part(SW) ······················································ 32
6.3.2. Menu Tree Structure for Circuit Breaker Part(CB) ······································ 33
6.3.3. Common Menu Tree Structure ·············································································· 34
6.4. Initial Screen ························································································································ 35
6.4.1. Common Initial Screen ····························································································· 35
6.4.2. Circuit Initial Screen ································································································· 38
6.5. Configuration of the Menu Screen ·············································································· 41
6.6. Setting Example ·················································································································· 42
6.7. Settings Save ······················································································································· 43
7. COMMON MAIN MENU ·························································································· 44
7.1. Global Settings ···················································································································· 44
7.1.1. General Settings ········································································································· 45
7.1.2. Communication Settings ··························································································· 88
7.2. Common Event Recorder ······························································································ 148
7.2.1. Operation Events ······································································································ 149
7.2.2. Fault Events ··············································································································· 150
7.2.3. Fault Waves - Summary ······················································································· 151
7.2.4. System Events ·········································································································· 152
7.2.5. Set Change Events ·································································································· 154
7.2.6. Diagnostic Events ···································································································· 155
7.2.7. Clear Saved Data ····································································································· 156
7.3. Maintenance ····················································································································· 157
7.3.1. Control Count ············································································································ 157
7.3.2. Maintenance Data Reset ························································································ 158
7.3.3. Controller Information ·························································································· 158
iv
Multi-Way Switchgear Controller ETR606
7.4. Time ····································································································································· 159
7.5. Status ··································································································································· 160
7.5.1. ETR606 Status ·········································································································· 160
7.5.2. Input Ports ·················································································································· 162
7.5.3. Output Ports ·············································································································· 163
7.6. Metering ······························································································································ 164
7.6.1. Frequency ················································································································· 164
7.6.2. DC Channel ················································································································ 165
7.6.3. Control Reference ···································································································· 166
8. CIRCUIT MAIN MENU ··························································································· 167
8.1. Group Settings ·················································································································· 167
8.1.1. Group Settings for Switch(S/W) type ······························································· 168
8.1.2. Group Settings for Circuit Breacker(C/B) type ············································ 206
8.2. Circuit Event Recorder – Load & Energy Event ················································· 251
8.2.1. Load & Energy Field Configuration ·································································· 251
8.2.2. Load & Energy/Min Event ··················································································· 254
8.2.3. Load & Energy/Hour Event ················································································· 255
8.2.4. Load & Energy/Day Event ··················································································· 256
8.2.5. Clear Saved Data ····································································································· 257
8.3. Maintenance ······················································································································· 258
8.3.1. Count ···························································································································· 258
8.3.2. Contact Wear ············································································································· 261
8.3.3. Data Reset ·················································································································· 261
8.4. Status ··································································································································· 262
8.5. Metering ······························································································································ 264
8.5.1. Current ························································································································· 264
8.5.2. Voltage ························································································································· 265
8.5.3. Power ··························································································································· 265
8.5.4. Energy ·························································································································· 266
8.5.5. Demand ························································································································ 267
v
Multi-Way Switchgear Controller ETR606
SAFETY NOTICE
Safety notice
Safety notice is to operate product safely and
correctly by preventing any accident or danger
before hand.
Safety notice is divided into two kinds, "WARNING"
and "CAUTION" and meanings are as following:
WARNING
Injury
or
loss
of
life
can
happen
in
case
of
violating this sign
CAUTION
Minor injury or product damage can happen in case
of violating this sign
vi
Multi-Way Switchgear Controller ETR606
WARNING
Ÿ
Do not work on wiring when power is on or
while machine is operating.
It could cause an electric shock. In addition, protection element can be
triggered.
Ÿ
Avoid any kind of wiring work when bus bar is
live.
Damage or fire due to an electric shock and charging voltage can happen.
Ÿ
Conduct grounding.
Not conducting grounding might cause electric shock.
Ÿ
Do not disassemble product even when power is
off.
It could cause electric shock from charging current inside product.
Ÿ
Do not operate switch with wet hands.
It could cause electric shock.
Ÿ
Do not use a product that has a damaged cable
cladding.
It could cause electric shock.
Ÿ
Work on terminal when cable is disconnected.
It could cause electric shock from exposed part of cable.
vii
Multi-Way Switchgear Controller ETR606
CAUTION
Ÿ
Approve power of product's P.N power terminal so
that it suits polarity and rating.
Not following rated specification might cause damage or fire in product.
Ÿ
Do not allow materials such as screw, stone, oil and
etc. inside product.
It could cause damage and fire in product.
Ÿ
Follow rated load specification of input and output
contact.
It could cause damage and fire in product.
Ÿ
Confirm terminal number when connecting input and
output terminal.
In case wiring is not connected properly, it could cause product damage or fire.
Ÿ
When installing or repairing, it shall be performed
by a specialist.
Malfunction or accident can happen due to improper installation.
Ÿ
Specifications
to
be
checked
prior
to
power
insertion
Check voltage and polarity of control power.
Check connection of input and output terminal.
Ÿ
Matters
that
require
attention
treating
Store in a place with no humidity and dust.
Do not apply force or throw when transporting.
viii
when
storing
and
Multi-Way Switchgear Controller ETR606
1. INTRODUCTION
ETR606 is a multi-way switchgear controller installed in a medium voltage line,
which can be controlled locally from the controller front panel or remotely
through a communication system. ETR606 can support up to 6 circuit ways,
where the circuit’s switch can be a combination of circuit breakers and load
breaker switches. The ETR606 types can be distinguished based on the maximum
number of the supported ways of the switchgear. ETR606-4 can support up to 4
circuit ways only, while the ETR606-6 can support up to 6 circuit ways.
ETR606 can receive measured signal and status information from each way of
switchgear and its controller. So it can inspect voltage and current flow on
distribution line. It can remotely transmit distribution line status such as FI
detection, single line/phase loss, live/dead line, phase difference, over current,
direction of power flow, direction of fault detection as well as condition of each
way of switchgear and its controller.
Because it can supports to receive remotely control command from each way of
switchgear breaker
distribution automation system is perfectly supported. It can
be
for
easily
applied
user's
communication
environment
through
various
communication method (DNP3.0, MODBUS, IEC60870-5-101/104 and IEC61850
(option)) support.
ETR606 provides various system operation information required by analyzing fault
record, operation record, fault waveform, load record and other event save
functions.
Control switch on front panel can be used to operate manual open/close for each
way of switchgear, and select fault detect/restrain, ground detect normal/restrain,
control select local/remote, and control lock/unlock operation mode.
ETR606 has a PLC (Programmable Logic Control) which can be changed by user.
The PLC can control input and output using information of timer, counter and
internal event.
INTERFACE SOFTWARE is easy to use and things such as set value and
operation record can be saved and administered in PC. It is useful for fault
analysis since it has an excellent zoom function and it has a function that
Indicate fault waveform and digital operation factor status together with time.
1
Multi-Way Switchgear Controller ETR606
1.1. Summary of Features
PRORTECTION (C/B Control Type)
Ÿ
Automatic Reclosing(Up To 4 Shots)
Ÿ
Phase Time Delay Overcurrent Element
Ÿ
Phase Instantaneous Overcurrent Element
Ÿ
Ground Time Delay Overcurrent Element
Ÿ
Ground Instantaneous Overcurrent Element
Ÿ
Negative Sequence Time Delay Overcurrent Element
Ÿ
Negative Sequence Instantaneous Overcurrent Element
Ÿ
Under Voltage and Over Voltage Elements
Ÿ
Under Frequency and Over Frequency Elements
Ÿ
Inrush Restraint
Ÿ
Phase Directional Control
Ÿ
Ground Directional Control
Ÿ
Negative Sequence Directional Control
FAULT INDICATION（S/W Control Type)
Ÿ
Phase Fault Indication
Ÿ
Ground Fault Indication
Ÿ
Negative Sequence Fault Indication
Ÿ
Inrush Restraint
Ÿ
Auto Section
Ÿ
Phase Directional Control
Ÿ
Ground Directional Control
Ÿ
Negative Sequence Directional Control
MONITORING
Ÿ
Live Line / Dead Lind for Each Circuit
Ÿ
Phase Difference for Each Circuit
Ÿ
Open Phase for Each Circuit
Ÿ
Operation Count for Each Circuit
Ÿ
Conact Wear per Phase for Each Circuit
Ÿ
Battery Automatic Load Test & Battery Management
Ÿ
System Power
Ÿ
DC Analoge Chanel Monitor
2
Multi-Way Switchgear Controller ETR606
CONTROL
Ÿ
Automatic Load Transfer Switch (ALTS) Control
METERING
Ÿ
Each Phase Current and Angle : Ia, Ib, Ic, Ig for each circuit
Ÿ
Each Phase and Line to Line Voltage and Angle : Va, Vb, Vc for each circuit
Ÿ
Current and Voltage Symmetrical Component : I1, I2, 3I0, V1, V2, 3V0
Ÿ
1 Way and 4 Way Frequency, Frequency Change Rate, Slip Frequency and
Slip Angle
Ÿ
Single Phase and Three Phase Power : Active Power(kW), Rective Power(kVar),
Apparent Power(kVA), Power Factor(%) for each circuit
Ÿ
Positive and Negative Energy : Active Eenergy(kWh), Reactive Energy(kVarh)
for each circuit
Ÿ
Analoge DC Input (DC1~4)
Ÿ
ETR606 Condition Reference
- Battery Voltage, Charger Voltage
- Battery Capacity
- ETR606 Controller Temperature
- System Power : +12V, -12V, Reference Voltage
EVENT RECORDER
Ÿ
Operation Recorder - last 5,000 events
Ÿ
Fault Event Recorder - last 1,500 events
Ÿ
Fault Waveform(60 cycles× 64 samples) - last 32 events
Ÿ
System Event Recorder - last 5,000 events
Ÿ
Setting Change Event Recorder - last 2,000 events
Ÿ
Load&Energy Recorder for each Circuit
- Average Load & Energy – last 8,640 events (Max 360 days)
- Peak Load & Energy in every hour – last 8,640 events
- Peak Load & Energy in every day – last 8,640 events
Ÿ
Diagnostic Event Recorder - last 2,000 events
NOTE : According to stting, all events can support COMFEDE format.
According to stting, waveform can support COTRADE format.
The recorded event items and the maximum number of events may
vary depending on the user's requirements, options and versions of
ETR606.
3
Multi-Way Switchgear Controller ETR606
MAINTENANCE
Ÿ
Restart and Diagnostic counters
Ÿ
Operation counters for each Circuit
Ÿ
Fault Trip and Fault counters for each Circuit
Ÿ
Contact Wear for each Circuit
COMMUNICATIONS
Ÿ
Side panel RS232-1 and RS232-2 Serial Ports : DNP 3.0, Modbus and
IEC60870-5-101 Protocol, ETR606 Interface Software
Ÿ
Side
panel
RS485-1
and
RS485-2
Ports
:
DNP
3.0,
Modbus
and
IEC60870-5-101 Protocol
Ÿ
Side panel Eth1 and Eth2 Ethernet Ports or Fiber Optic(Option) Ports : DNP
3.0, Modbus,
IEC61850 and
IEC60870-5-104
Protocol
Protocol,
ETR606
Interface Software
Ÿ
Side panel PORT SPI-1,2 (Option) : I/O expendable communication(RJ-45,
RS-422 communication method used)
Ÿ
Front Panel USB-B Type Port: ETR606 Interface Software
USER INTERFACE
Ÿ
Fault Indicators
Ÿ
Manual Battery Load Test: Battery Voltage and Charge Voltage
Ÿ
Dual Functional Keypads
Ÿ
5 inch LCD Display
Ÿ
4 HMI Line Editor Screen
Ÿ
LED indicators - Fault indications, Auto Reclosing Sequence status, Battery
status, etc
Ÿ
Setting Range and Key Help Messages
Ÿ
Access Security(3 Passwords with Different Authorites)
OTHERS
Ÿ
HMI Line Editor
Ÿ
Programmable Logic Control(PLC)
Ÿ
Time Synchronism Device (IRIG) – Option
Ÿ
Wifi – Option
Ÿ
GPS - Option
4
Multi-Way Switchgear Controller ETR606
AUXILIARY INPUTS
Ÿ
32 Opto-isolated Programmable Inputs
AUXILIARY OUTPUTS
Ÿ
5
20 Dry Contact Programmable Outputs
Multi-Way Switchgear Controller ETR606
2. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
2.1. Usage Condition
Conditions of use
Ÿ
Maximum 70℃, minimum -25℃, elevation below 1,000m
2.2. Input & Output
Power
Ÿ
Input voltage : DC 24V(Normal using range: 19V ~ 29V)
Ÿ
Power consumption : Below 20W
Current Transformer Input (CT)
Ÿ
Measurement rating : AC 0.6A nominal, AC 1.2A continuous, AC 20A 1second
Ÿ
Measurement burden : Below 0.5VA (0.6A)
Voltage Transformer Input (PT)
Ÿ
Measurement rating : AC 4V(50~150%)
Ÿ
Measurement burden : 0.002VA
Control Input
Ÿ
Control Inputs 32 channel
Ÿ
Nominal Voltages and Operating Range
n 250Vdc (-15%, +20%)
n 125Vdc (-15%, +20%)
n 48Vdc (-15%, +20%)
n 24Vdc (-15%, +20%) ― standard
Ÿ
Operating current : < 5mA at Nominal Voltages
Output Contacts
Ÿ
Outputs 20 Channel
n 350Vdc Varistor for differential surge protection
n Make : 30A
n Carry : 6A Continuous Carry
n Break Capacity
- 125V 0.3A L/R=25ms
6
Multi-Way Switchgear Controller ETR606
2.3. Type Withstand Tests
Electromagntic Compatibility Immnuity (IEC 60255-26)
Ÿ
Electrostatic Discharge Immunity : IEC 61000-4-2
Contact : 2㎸, 4㎸, 6㎸, Air : 2㎸, 4㎸, 8㎸
Ÿ
Raidated eletromagnetic field Immunity : IEC 61000-4-3
10V/m, 80%, AM 1 ㎑,
SWEEP : 80 ~ 1 000㎒, 1,4 ~ 2.7㎓,
SPOT : 80㎒, 160㎒, 380㎒, 450㎒, 900㎒, 1 850㎒, 2 150㎒
Ÿ
Electrical Fast Transient Burst Immunity : IEC 61000-4-4
4㎸ at 5㎑
Ÿ
Surge Immunity : IEC 61000-4-5
Lien to earth: 0.5㎸, 1㎸, 2㎸, 4㎸
Lien to Lien : 0.5㎸, 1㎸, 2㎸
Ÿ
Conducted disturbance immunity : IEC 61000-4-6
10V r.m.s, 80%, AM 1 ㎑, SWEEP : 0.15 ~ 80㎒, SPOT : 27㎒, 68㎒
Ÿ
Power frequency magnetic field immunity : IEC 61000-4-8
Continuous : 30 A/m, 60s, Short duration : 300 A/m, 1 to 3 s
Ÿ
Immunity to Condicted Low Frequency interference : IEC 61000-4-16
Differential: 150V / 100Ω+0.1㎌, Common : 300V / 220Ω+0.47㎌
Ÿ
AC component in DC(ripple) : IEC 61000-4-17
15% of rated d.c. value 100/120㎐
Ÿ
Slow Damped Oscillatory Wave Immunity : IEC 61000-4-18
Immunity test for 1 MHz burst , Common : 2.5㎸, Differential : 1.0㎸
Ÿ
Voltage dips, interruption immunity : IEC 61000-4-29
Voltage disp immunity test : 0%, 40%, 70%
Voltage interruptions immunity test : 0%
Ÿ
Gradual Shuntdown / Start-up
Shut-down ramp : 60s, Power off : 5 min, Start-up ramp : 60s
Ÿ
7
Emissoin test : CISPR11, Class A
Multi-Way Switchgear Controller ETR606
Environmental (IEC 60255-1)
Ÿ
Dry heat test – Operational : IEC 60068-2-2
16 hours at +85℃
Ÿ
Cold test – Operational : IEC 60068-2-1
16 hours at -40℃
Ÿ
Dry heat test at maximum storage temperature : IEC 60068-2-2
16 hours at +85℃
Ÿ
Cold test at minimum storage temperature : IEC 60068-2-1
16 hours at -40℃
Ÿ
Change of temperature test : IEC 60068-2-14
- 40℃(3h)~85℃(3h) / 1 Cycle x 5 cycle
Ÿ
Damp heat steady-state test : IEC 60068-2-78
25℃~40℃ / 93%, 240h / 1 Cycle
Ÿ
Cyclic temperature with humidity test : IEC 60068-2-30
25℃~55℃ / 95%, (24h / 1 Cycle) x 6 Cycle
Ÿ
Vibration response and endurance : IEC 60255-21-1
Ÿ
Shock response, shock withstand and bump : IEC 60255-21-2
Ÿ
Seismic : IEC 60255-21-3
Degrees of protection provided by enclosures (IP Code) (IEC 60529)
Ÿ
Protection against access to hazardous parts (IP2X)
Ÿ
Protection against solid foreign objects (IP2X)
Safety (IEC 60255-27)
Ÿ
Dielectric Strength : IEC 60255-27 : 2013
2000 Vac on Control inputs, control outputs, and analog inputs,
communication for 1minute
Ÿ
Impulse : IEC 60255-27 : 2013, 0.5 J, 5 kV, 1.2/50 ㎲
Ÿ
Insulation resistance : IEC 60255-27 : 2013, 100 ㏁ at 500 V d.c
8
Multi-Way Switchgear Controller ETR606
2.4. Communication Port
[Table 2-1] Communication Port
Side Panel
RS232-1, RS232-2
Side Panel
RS485-1, RS485-2
Side Panel EN1, EN2
Side panel SPI-1, SPI-2
(* Option)
or 2 Stop bit
DNP 3.0, Modbus, IEC60870-5-101 and Interface Software
RS485,1200-115200bps, None, Odd or Even Parity, 7 or 8 Data bits, 1
or 2 Stop bit
DNP 3.0, Modbus and IEC60870-5-101
RJ-45 or Fiber Optic(Option),10BASE-T/100BASE-T
DNP 3.0, Modbus, IEC60870-5-104, IEC61850 and Interface Software
RJ-45, RS-422 communication method used
I/O expendable communication port
Side panel Wifi
SMA-Female Type
(* Option)
Interface Software
Front Panel USB
9
RS232,1200-115200bps, None, Odd or Even Parity, 7 or 8 Data bits, 1
USB- B Type
ETR606 interface software
Multi-Way Switchgear Controller ETR606
3. DIMENSIONS AND CONSTRUCTION
3.1. ETR606-6
2
OUT101
A
OUT102
6
FUN
2
OUT105
B
3
4
OUT106
6
FG
8
5
ZG
OUT104
7
4
0V
POWER IN
5
OUT103
3
+24V
4
2
0V
3
P
+24V
UP
6
7
3
8
ENT
SEL
COM
OUT108
2
1IA 1IB 1IC
OUT107
5
R
DOWN
4
6
2L/ACT
2SPEED
1L/ACT
1SPEED
1IG
5
SYSTEM
4
OUT202
3
3
ETHERNET1
2
2
2IA 2IB 2IC
OUT201
E
S
RUN RST DIAG
RS232
RX
TX
RS485
RTS CTS
RX
TX
5
7
8
T
2
3
OUT205
F
2
3IA 3IB 3IC
OUT204
6
ETHERNET2
6
2IG
5
OUT203
4
1 LIVE
AC POWER OK
2 LIVE
CHARGER OK
3 LIVE
BATTERY OK
4 LIVE
CB BLOCK
DBG
RS232
4
DSP LINK
6 LIVE
CPU LINK
INDICATOR
RS232-1
8
3
OUT208
7
2
4IA 4IB 4IC
6
U
OUT207
6
5
3IG
5
OUT206
4
3
5 LIVE
51
2
OUT209
G
4IG
6
GND
ENABLED
ENABLED
BATT
TEST
A
REMOTE
L
LOCK
L
LOCAL
UL
UNLOCK
OPERATION
EARTH
50
79
RS
79
CY
RS232-2
4
OUT210
3
2
7
N
FG
2
FG
03
N
IN201 02
3
6IG
5
2
H
4
RS485-2
P
3
6IA 6IB 6IC
Y
RS485-1
P
8
6
OUT212
6
5
5IG
4
6
C
N
51
50
79
RS
79
CY
A
B
C
N
50
79
RS
79
CY
CLOSE
2
OUT211
5
3
5IA 5IB 5IC
X
B
05
06
7
07
8
08
IN101 02
CLOSE
ENABLED
ENABLED
CLOSE
ENABLED
ENABLED
CLOSE
OPEN
EARTH
B
C
N
11
04
12
05
51
50
79
RS
79
CY
OPEN
EARTH
03
IN209 10
4
13
06
14
07
7
15
08
4
6
3
5
2
3VA 3VB 3VC
W
3
8
2
I
7
ENABLED
4
9
6
2VA 2VB 2VC
5
ENABLED
C
04
6
4
5
3
1VA 1VB 1VC
2
4
V
A
OPEN
EARTH
3
51
LAMP TARGET
TEST RESET
R
1
4
5
PROT'
ETHERNET
L/ACT100M
A
mA
+DC1
2
IN217 18
J
8
21
22
BAT-V
+DC3
20
6
mA
+DC2
19
5
4
4
3
3
2
5VA 5VB 5VC
Z
N
51
50
79
RS
79
CY
A
B
C
N
50
79
RS
79
CY
5
23
8
24
CHG-V
+DC4
7
6
ENABLED
CLOSE
ENABLED
ENABLED
CLOSE
A
OPEN
EARTH
B
C
OPEN
N
9
7
6VA 6VB 6VC
5
ENABLED
6
51
OPEN
EARTH
K
9
7
C
16
8
6
4VA 4VB 4VC
5
B
8
<Figure 3-1> ETR606-6 Construction and Dimensions
10
Multi-Way Switchgear Controller ETR606
3.2. ETR606-4
2
OUT101
A
OUT102
OUT103
6
8
OUT104
7
0V
5
ZG
6
FG
3
4
OUT106
+24V
4
2
OUT105
B
3
POWER IN
5
0V
4
+24V
2
3
P
4
8
OUT108
7
6
E
S
ETHERNET1
3
4
OUT202
2
3
2IA 2IB 2IC
2
OUT201
2L/AC T
2S PEED
1L/AC T
1S PEED
1IG
5
5
6
7
8
T
2
OUT205
F
2
3
DB G
RS 2 32
7
8
OUT208
RS232-1
U
2
3
4IA 4IB 4IC
6
OUT207
6
5
3IG
5
4
OUT206
3
4
4
50
79
RS
79
CY
B
C
N
51
50
79
RS
79
CY
A
B
C
N
2
OUT209
6
G
4IG
5
4
OUT210
3
5
6
P
8
N
OUT212
7
FG
P
03
4
04
FG
IN201 02
3
N
2
H
05
6
06
7
07
8
08
2
3
4
5
A
1VA 1VB 1VC
V
5
05
13
14
15
8
16
08
04
12
7
07
11
6
06
IN209 10
5
3
5
K
9
6
22
7
23
8
24
CHG-V
+DC4
21
6
BAT-V
+DC3
20
5
mA
+DC2
19
4
mA
+DC1
IN217 18
3
J
8
2
7
4VA 4VB 4VC
4
2
3VA 3VB 3VC
W
4
3
7
8
2
I
6
2VA 2VB 2VC
9
03
N
IN101 02
C
RS485-2
B
RS485-1
A
RS232-2
79
CY
C
79
RS
OUT211
50
LOCK
UNLOCK
3IA 3IB 3IC
OUT204
ETHERNET2
5
2IG
6
OUT203
4
OPEN
CLOSE
ENABLED
ENABLED
51
COM
3
EARTH
4
OPEN
CLOSE
N
ENABLED
C
ENABLED
B
ENT
SEL
2
EARTH
3
OPEN
CLOSE
A
ENABLED
79
CY
ENABLED
79
RS
DOWN
1IA 1IB 1IC
6
OUT107
5
R
9
11
EARTH
2
OPEN
CLOSE
ENABLED
50
L
CPU LINK
UL
DSP LINK
6 LIVE
LOCAL
CB BLOCK
5 LIVE
REMOTE
4 LIVE
L
BATTERY OK
R
CHARGER OK
3 LIVE
OPERATION
GND
PROT'
INDICATOR
ENABLED
51
51
EARTH
1
LAMP TARGET
TEST RESET
AC POW ER OK
2 LIVE
BATT
TEST
1 LIVE
L/ACT100M
TX
RX
RTS CTS
ETHERNET
RS485
RS232
SYSTEM
TX
RX
RUN RST DIAG
FUN
UP
<Figure 3-2> ETR606-4 Construction and Dimensions
Multi-Way Switchgear Controller ETR606
4. SIDE PANEL CONSTRUCTION
ETR606 provides connectors for control, modem and
its placements are as
follows.
2L/ACT
2SPEED
1L/ACT
1SPEED
ET HERNE T 1
ET HERNE T 2
RS232 -1
RS232 -2
RS485 -1
RS485 -2
P
P
N
FG
N
IN101 02
03
04
05
06
07
08
IN209 10
11
12
13
14
15
4
5
6
7
mA
+DC1
mA
+DC2
BAT- V
+DC3
CHG-V
+DC4
19
20
21
22
23
24
3
4
5
6
7
8
FG
DBG
RS2 32
OUT 101
OUT 102
OUT 103
OUT 104
OUT 105
OUT 106
OUT 107
A
3
5
7
B
3
5
2
4
6
8
2
POWER IN
+24V
0V
+24V
0V
ZG
FG
P
2
3
4
5
6
4
OUT 108
6
7
8
1IA
1IB
1IC
R
2
3
1IG
4
5
6
C
OUT 201
OUT 202
OUT 203
OUT 204
OUT 205
OUT 206
OUT 207
OUT 208
E
3
5
7
F
3
5
7
2
4
2IA
2IB
2IC
S
2
3
6
2IG
4
5
6
8
2
3IA 3IB
3IC
T
3
2
4
6
3IG
4
5
6
OUT 209
G
8
4IA 4IB
4IC
U
3
2
2
4IG
4
5
6
OUT 210
OUT 211
OUT 212
5
7
3
4
5IA
5IB 5IC
X
2
3
6
5
H
8
5IG
4
IN201 02
6
6IA
6IB 6IC
Y
2
3
2
03
04
3
4
6IG
4
5
05
06
07
08
5
6
7
8
1VA 1VB 1VC
6
V
2
3
K
9
I
2
3
2VA 2VB 2VC
4
5
6
7
3VA 3VB 3VC
8
W
2
3
16
8
IN217 18
J
9
2
4VA 4VB 4VC
4
5
6
7
5VA 5VB 5VC
8
Z
2
3
9
6VA 6VB 6VC
4
5
6
7
8
<Figure 4-1> Side Panel
4.1. Current Input Connector
Current connector is arranged in order of the number for each way of
switchgear. No. 1 connector for each way of switchgear matches with phase A
and goes along in B, C, Ground current connector order. Near the current
connector part, name of each way of switchgear and phase is stated.
1IA 1IB 1IC
R
2
3
1IG
4
5
2IA 2IB 2IC
6
S
2
3
2IG
4
5
3IA 3IB 3IC
6
T
2
3
3IG
4
5
4IA 4IB 4IC
6
U
2
3
4IG
4
5
5IA 5IB 5IC
6
X
<Figure 4-2> Current Connector
12
2
3
5IG
4
5
6IA 6IB 6IC
6
Y
2
3
6IG
4
5
6
Multi-Way Switchgear Controller ETR606
[Table 4-1] Current Connector Pin
Pin
R1
R2
R3
R4
Terminal Name
1IA
1IB
1IC
COM
Phase A
Phase B
Phase C
COM
Description
S1
S2
S3
S4
Terminal Name
2IA
2IB
2IC
COM
Phase A
Phase B
Phase C
COM
T1
T2
T3
T4
Terminal Name
3IA
3IB
3IC
COM
Phase A
Phase B
Phase C
COM
U1
U2
U3
U4
Terminal Name
4IA
4IB
4IC
COM
Phase A
Phase B
Phase C
COM
X1
X2
X3
X4
Terminal Name
5IA
5IB
5IC
COM
Phase A
Phase B
Phase C
COM
Y1
Y2
Y3
Y4
Terminal Name
6IA
6IB
6IC
COM
Phase A
Phase B
Phase C
COM
Remark
13
S5
S6
2IG
Ground +
Ground-
T5
T6
3IG
Ground +
Ground-
U5
U6
4IG
Ground +
Ground-
X5
X6
5IG
Ground +
Ground-
Y5
Y6
5 WAY
Pin
Description
Ground-
4 WAY
Pin
Description
Ground +
3 WAY
Pin
Description
1IG
2 WAY
Pin
Description
R6
1 WAY
Pin
Description
R5
6IG
Ground +
Ground-
6 WAY
* Connector Plug: AKZ950/6P-5.08, * Maker : PTR HARTMANN
Multi-Way Switchgear Controller ETR606
4.2. Voltage Input Connector
Voltage connector is a part of injected 3 phase (A, B, C) voltage and zero
voltage for each way of switchgear and is composed in follows.
1VA 1VB 1VC
V
2
3
2VA 2VB 2VC
4
5
6
7
3VA 3VB 3VC
8
W
2
3
4VA 4VB 4VC
4
5
6
7
5VA 5VB 5VC
Z
8
2
3
6VA 6VB 6VC
4
5
6
7
8
<Figure 4-3> Voltage Connector
[Table 4-2] Voltage Connector Pin
Pin
V1
V2
V3
V4
V5
V6
V7
V8
Terminal Name
1VA
1VB
1VC
1VN
2VA
2VB
2VC
2VN
Phase
Phase
Phase
Phase
Phase
Phase
A
B
C
A
B
C
Description
COM
1 WAY
COM
2 WAY
Pin
W1
W2
W3
W4
W5
W6
W7
W8
Terminal Name
3VA
3VB
3VC
3VN
4VA
4VB
4VC
4VN
Phase
Phase
Phase
Phase
Phase
Phase
A
B
C
A
B
C
Description
COM
3 WAY
COM
4 WAY
Pin
Z1
Z2
Z3
Z4
Z5
Z6
Z7
Z7
Terminal Name
5VA
5VB
5VC
5VN
6VA
6VB
6VC
6VN
Phase
Phase
Phase
Phase
Phase
Phase
A
B
C
A
B
C
Description
5 WAY
Remark
14
COM
COM
6 WAY
* Connector Plug: AKZ950/8P-5.08, * Maker : PTR HARTMANN
Multi-Way Switchgear Controller ETR606
4.3. Digital Output Connector
Digital output(DO) part is composed of a total of 20 relay outputs. Digital output
connector, as a part that outputs command of control part, is composed in
follows.
4.3.1. Common Connector
OUT101 OUT102 OUT103 OUT104
OUT105 OUT106 OUT107 OUT108
A
B
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
<Figure 4-4> Digital Output Connector (Common Part)
[Table 4-3] Digital Output Connector Pin (Common Part)
Pin
A1, A2
A3, A4
A5, A6
A7, A8
Terminal Name
OUT101
OUT102
OUT103
OUT104
Close
Open
Close
Open
Description
6 WAY
Pin
B1, B2
B3, B4
B5, B6
B7, B8
Terminal Name
OUT105
Spare5
OUT106
Spare6
OUT107
Batt' Test
OUT108
Spare7
Description
Remark
COMMON
* Connector Plug: AKZ950/8P-5.08, * Maker : PTR HARTMANN
※. NOTE ) This description is applicable to factory default PLC of ETR606-06.
Following PLC setting for user’s purpose or specific usage required,
above description can be changed.
15
Multi-Way Switchgear Controller ETR606
4.3.2. Circuit Connector
OUT201 OUT202 OUT203 OUT204
OUT205 OUT206 OUT207 OUT208
OUT209 OUT210 OUT211 OUT212
E
F
G
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
<Figure 4-5> Digital Output Connector (Circuit Part)
[Table 4-4] Digital Output Connector Pin (Circuit Part)
Pin
E1, E2
E3, E4
E5, E6
E7, E8
Terminal Name
OUT201
OUT202
OUT203
OUT204
Close
Open
Close
Open
Description
Pin
Terminal Name
Description
1 WAY
F1, F2
OUT205
F3, F4
OUT206
F5, F6
OUT207
F7, F8
OUT208
Close
Open
Close
Open
2 WAY
3 WAY
Pin
G1, G2
G3, G4
G5, G6
G7, G8
Terminal Name
OUT209
Close
OUT210
Open
OUT212
Close
OUT213
Open
Description
Remark
4 WAY
5 WAY
* Connector Plug: AKZ950/8P-5.08, * Maker : PTR HARTMANN
※. NOTE ) This description is applicable to factory default
PLC of ETR606-06.
Following PLC setting for user’s purpose or specific usage required,
above description can be changed.
16
Multi-Way Switchgear Controller ETR606
4.4. Digital Input Connector
Digital input (DI) part receives 32 status signals in total by using electrically
insulated contacts. At same time of making surge strength in DI part higher, it is
used
to
insulate
signal
connection
with
weak
Main
Module.
Digital
input
connector, as a part that receives status input from control part, is composed in
follows.
4.4.1. Common Connector
IN101 02
03
04
05
06
07
08
C
<Figure 4-6> Digital Input Connector(Common Part)
[Table 4-5] Digital Input Connector Pin (Common Part)
Pin
C1
C2
C3
C4
C5
C6
C7
C8
C9
Terminal Name
IN101
IN102
IN103
IN104
IN105
IN106
IN107
IN108
COM
AC
DC
Door
Gas
Error
Error
Open
Low
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
COM
Description
COMMON
Remark
* Connector Plug: AKZ950/9P-5.08, * Maker : PTR HARTMANN
※. NOTE ) 1. AC Error : Input when AC power is lost.
2. DC Error : Input when AC power is lost and battery over
discharges (input 30 secs before power breaking).
3. This description is applicable to factory default PLC. Following
PLC setting for user’s purpose or specific usage required, above
description can be changed.
17
Multi-Way Switchgear Controller ETR606
4.4.2. Circuit Connector
IN201 02
H
2
03
04
05
06
07
08
3
4
5
6
7
8
IN209 10
I
9
2
11
12
13
14
15
16
3
4
5
6
7
8
IN217 18
9
J
2
19
20
21
22
23
24
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
<Figure 4-7> Digital Input Connector(Circuit Part)
[Table 4-6] Digital Input Connector Pin(Circuit Part)
Pin
H1
H2
H3
H4
H5
H6
H7
H8
H9
Terminal Name
IN201
IN202
IN203
IN204
IN205
IN206
IN207
IN208
COM
Close
Open
Ground
ETOM
Close
Open
Ground
ETOM
Description
1 WAY
2 WAY
COM
Pin
I1
I2
I3
I4
I5
I6
I7
I8
I9
Terminal Name
IN209
IN210
IN211
IN212
IN213
IN214
IN215
IN216
COM
Close
Open
Ground
ETOM
Close
Open
Ground
ETOM
Description
3 WAY
4 WAY
COM
Pin
J1
J2
J3
J4
J5
J6
J7
J8
J9
Terminal Name
IN217
IN218
IN219
IN220
IN221
IN222
IN223
IN224
COM
Close
Open
Ground
ETOM
Close
Open
Ground
ETOM
Description
Remark
5 WAY
6 WAY
COM
* Connector Plug: AKZ950/9P-5.08, * Maker : PTR HARTMANN
4.5. Power Input Connector
Power connector is an input terminal to supply operation power for control part
and is composed in follows.
[Table 4-7] Power Input Connector Pin
POWER IN
+24V
0V
+24V
0V
ZG
FG
Pin
P4
P5
P6
Terminal Name +24V 0V +24V 0V
ZG
FG
Description
P
2
3
4
5
6
<Figure 4-8> Power Connector
18
Remarks
P1
+24V
P2
0V
P3
+24V
0V
Surge Frame
ground ground
* Connector Plug: AKZ960/6P-7.62
* Maker : PTR HARTMANN
Multi-Way Switchgear Controller ETR606
4.6. DC Input Connector
DC input connector is a terminal to input DC analog value and is composed in
following way.
mA
+DC1
mA
+DC2
BAT-V
+DC3
CHG-V
+DC4
K
<Figure 4-9> DC Input Connector
[Table 4-8] DC Input Connector Pin
Pin
K1, K2
K3, K4
K5, K6
Terminal Name
DC01
DC02
DC03
Description
Remarks
K7, K8
DC04
Charging circuit
Spare 1
Spare 2
Battery voltage
voltage
Current type: 4~20mA
Voltage type: 0~35V
* Connector Plug: AKZ950/8P-5.08,
* Maker : PTR HARTMANN
※. NOTE ) DC3 and DC4 is used for measurement of battery voltage and charge
circuit voltage and for determination of faulty battery and charge
circuit during battery test.
19
Multi-Way Switchgear Controller ETR606
4.7. Communication Port
4.7.1. RS232 Port
RS232 has D-SUB 9pin as Male type and all pins are connected except pin
number 9, RI(Ring Indicator). Use shielded cables.
[Table 4-9] RS232 Port Pin
Pin No.
RS232-1
Description
1
DCD : Data Carrier Detect
2
RXD : Receive Data(IN)
3
TXD : Transmit Data(OUT)
4
DTR : Data Terminal Ready(OUT)
5
GND : Ground
6
DSR : Data Set Ready(IN)
7
RTS : Request To Send(OUT)
8
CTS : Clear To Send(IN)
9
N/C : No Connection
RS232-2
<Figure 4-10> RS232 Port
4.7.2. RS485 Port
RS485 communication port has 3pins and the pin composition is in follows.
RS485-1
RS485-2
P
P
N
FG
N
FG
<Figure 4-11> 485 Comm. Port
20
[Table 4-10] RS485 Port Pin
Pin No.
Description
1
RS485+
2
RS485-
3
SG (Cable Shield)
Multi-Way Switchgear Controller ETR606
4.7.3. Ethernet Port
Ethernet1 and 2 are RJ-45 that has 8pins as in "Table 4‑11.Ethernet Port Pin".
Ethernet port can be selected between TP and FX type. If FX type is used, LC
type optical communication will be supported.
1L/ACT
1SPEED
2L/ACT
2SPEED
ETHERNET1
ETHERNET2
[Table 4-11] Ethernet Port Pin
Pin No.
Wire Color
1
White/Green
10Base-T Signal
100Base-TX Signal
Transmit+
2
Green
Transmit-
3
White/Orange
Receive+
4
Blue
Unused
5
White/Blue
Unused
6
Orange
Receive-
7
White/Brown
Unused
8
Brown
Unused
[Ethernet TP]
1L/ACT
1SPEED
2L/ACT
2SPEED
ETHERNET1
ETHERNET2
[Ethernet FX]
<Figure 4-12> Ethernet Port
4.7.4. IRIG-B Connector - Option
It is a IRIG-B connector for time synchronization function using Time
Synchronization module.
IRIG-B
P
N
<Figure 4-13> IRIG-B
21
[Table 4-12] IRIG-B Pin
Pin No.
Description
1
POSITIVE
2
NEGATIVE
Multi-Way Switchgear Controller ETR606
5. USER INTERFACE PANEL
SYSTEM
RUN RST DIAG
RX
RS232
RS485
ETHERNET
TX
RX
L/ACT100M
RTS CTS
TX
1 LIVE
AC POWER OK
2 LIVE
CHARGER OK
3 LIVE
BATTERY OK
4 LIVE
CB BLOCK
5 LIVE
DSP LINK
6 LIVE
CPU LINK
INDICATOR
PROT'
BATT
TEST
DOWN
ENT
SEL
COM
LAMP TARGET
TEST RESET
REMOTE
L
LOCK
L
LOCAL
UL
UNLOCK
GND
OPERATION
EARTH
51
50
79
RS
79
CY
A
B
C
N
ENABLED
ENABLED
CLOSE
2
OPEN
EARTH
51
50
79
RS
79
CY
A
B
C
N
51
50
79
RS
79
CY
A
B
C
N
ENABLED
ENABLED
CLOSE
3
OPEN
EARTH
ENABLED
ENABLED
CLOSE
4
OPEN
EARTH
51
50
79
RS
79
CY
A
B
C
N
50
79
RS
79
CY
B
C
N
51
50
79
RS
79
CY
A
B
C
N
ENABLED
ENABLED
CLOSE
5
A
FUN
R
1
51
UP
OPEN
EARTH
ENABLED
ENABLED
CLOSE
6
OPEN
EARTH
ENABLED
ENABLED
CLOSE
OPEN
<Figure 5-1> ETR606-6 User Interface Panel
22
Multi-Way Switchgear Controller ETR606
SYSTEM
RUN RST DIAG
RS232
RX
TX
RS485
RTS CTS
RX
TX
1 LIVE
AC POWER OK
2 LIVE
CHARGER OK
3 LIVE
BATTERY OK
4 LIVE
CB BLOCK
5 LIVE
DSP LINK
6 LIVE
A
BATT
TEST
COM
LAMP TARGET
TEST RESET
REMOTE
L
LOCK
L
LOCAL
UL
UNLOCK
PROT'
GND
OPERATION
EARTH
50
B
79
RS
79
CY
C
N
ENABLED
ENABLED
CLOSE
OPEN
EARTH
50
B
79
RS
C
79
CY
ENABLED
ENABLED
CLOSE
OPEN
N
EARTH
51
50
79
RS
79
CY
A
B
C
N
ENABLED
ENABLED
CLOSE
4
A
SEL
R
3
51
ENT
L/ACT100M
2
51
DOWN
CPU LINK
INDICATOR
A
FUN
ETHERNET
1
51
UP
OPEN
EARTH
50
B
79
RS
C
79
CY
ENABLED
ENABLED
CLOSE
OPEN
N
<Figure 5-2> ETR606-4 User Interface Panel
23
Multi-Way Switchgear Controller ETR606
5.1. User defined LED Part
USER DEFINED LEDs indicate user-defined values on PLC. Detailed description
is in follows.
1 LIVE
AC POWER OK
2 LIVE
CHARGER OK
3 LIVE
BATTERY OK
4 LIVE
CB BLOCK
5 LIVE
DSP LINK
6 LIVE
CPU LINK
<Figure 5-3> User defined LED Part
LIVE LINE Lamp ( ULED1 ~ 6 )
It indicates the live line of each circuit.
AC POWER Lamp ( ULED13 )
It indicates the external power status and turns on when the 220Vac power is in
a supplying status.
CHARGER Lamp ( ULED14 )
The lamp turns on when it is normal voltage(above 23V) when
monitoring the
voltage of the charging circuit. Even if the charging circuit is normal, if the
battery voltage is below 23V when charging the battery due to the battery
over-discharge, the 'CHARGER' lamp does not turn on and it turns on when the
battery is charged and its voltage goes above 23V.
BATTERY Lamp ( ULED15 )
The lamp turns on when it is normal voltage(above 22V) when monitoring the
battery voltage.
24
Multi-Way Switchgear Controller ETR606
DSP LINK Lamp ( ULED17 )
It indicates the DSP link with MPU.
CPU LINK Lamp ( ULED18 )
It indicates the CPU link with MPU.
※. NOTE ) This description is applicable to factory default PLC of ETR606-06.
Following PLC setting for user’s purpose or specific usage required,
above description can be changed.
5.2. Common Control Part
All indicators show the status of the control function. The indicator lights RED or
GREEN when the control function is enabled/disabled. The push button toggles
Enable/Disable.
R
REMOTE
L
LOCK
L
LOCAL
UL
UNLOCK
<Figure 5-4> Local Control Part
REMOTE CONTROL (REMOTE/LOCAL)
- Remote(RED) : Remote/local control are both possible.
- Local(GREEN) : Local control is possible but remote control is not.
CONTROL LOCK (LOCKED/UNLOCKED)
- Unlocked(GREEN) : Control in remote/local are both possible.
- Locked(RED) : All control functions apart from battery tests do not operate in
local and remote.
The control operation lock is irrelevant to protection element.
25
Multi-Way Switchgear Controller ETR606
5.3. Local Control Part
All indicators show the status of Control function. The indicators are continuously
ON when control function is enable and indicators are continuously OFF when
control function is DISABLE. The push-button toggles Enable/Disable.
PROTECTION (ENABLED/DISABLED)
- ENABLED(On) :
PROT'
GND
ENABLED
ENABLED
All protection elements operate.
- DISABLED(Off) :
All protection elements do not operate.
GROUND (ENABLED/DISABLED)
- ENABLED(On) :
Ground protection element operates.
<Figure 5-5> Local Control Part
- DISABLED(Off) :
Ground protection element does not operate.
5.4. Open/Close Operation Part
Open/Close Button
CB operates if the button is pressed and the operation status can be checked
with the 'OPEN/CLOSE' lamp.
EARTH
CLOSE
OPEN
<Figure 5-6> Operation Part
EARTH Lamp
- The 'EARTH' lamp turns on if the CB inputs to the ground.
- The earth can be operated with a manual operating rod.
- Open/Close control is not possible in the earth input status.
26
Multi-Way Switchgear Controller ETR606
5.5. Fault Indication Part
A/B/C/N Lamp
INDICATOR
It indicates the fault phase that occurred when
the
fault
protection
element
of
each
circuit
1
operated.
51
50
79
RS
79
CY
A
B
C
N
51 Lamp
The lamp turns on when the 51 fault element is
detected.
50 Lamp
The lamp turns on when the 50 fault element is
<Figure 5-7> Fault Indication
Part
detected.
79RS Lamp
The lamp turns on when auto reclosing(79) reset
element is detected.
LAMP TARGET
TEST RESET
<Figure 5-8> F.I RESET Button
79CY Lamp
The lamp turns on when auto reclosing(79) cycle
element is detected
※. NOTE ) 51, 50, 79RS and 79CY lamp turns on only for C/B type.
F.I RESET/LAMP Button
This button resets (turns off) the fault indicator.
As button to test lamp, if pressed, all lamps turn on. RESET lamp does not turn
on. The RESET lamp turns on once when system is booting and turns off after.
27
Multi-Way Switchgear Controller ETR606
5.6. System & LCD Control Part
SYSTEM
RUN RST DIAG
RS232
RX
TX
RTS CTS
RS485
RX
TX
UP
FUN
DOWN
ENT
SEL
COM
ETHERNET
L/ACT100M
<Figure 5-9> System & LCD Control Part
RUN Lamp
It indicates ETR606's operation status. It periodically blinks during normal
operation. In case of system fault, it turns on or off.
RESET Lamp
It turns off after turning on every time system boots and if a system error
occurs during operation, it turns on.
DIAG' Lamp
It turns on if a self diagnosis warning occurs during system operation. Detailed
information can be checked in Common Menu "Diagnosis Event".
28
Multi-Way Switchgear Controller ETR606
5.6.1. Communication Status Indication Part
RS232
It is indicated if it is in main device remote communication.
- RX Lamp : It turns on in case of RS232 ports’s data received.
- TX Lamp : It turns on in case of RS232 ports’s data transmitted.
- RTS Lamp : It turns on in case of RS232 ports’s data be possible to transmit.
- CTS Lamp : It turns on in case of RS232 ports’s data required to transmit.
RS485
It is indicated if it is in 485 communication.
- RX Lamp : It turns on in case of RS485 ports’s data received.
- TX Lamp : It turns on in case of RS485 ports’s data transmitted.
ETHERNET
It is indicated if it is in Ethernet communication.
- LINK Lamp : It turns on if Ethernet ports are connected to network.
- ACT Lamp : It turns on if there is data in the LAN when Ethernet ports are
connected to the network.
5.6.2. Menu Control Part
Measurement and setting, record check and other things can be done in local
when using 5‘ LCD. Refer to "6. LCD CONTROL MANUAL" for more detail.
- 5’ LCD (27×11 Characters)
- 6 Control Keys (UP, DOWN, FUN, ENT, CIRCUIT SEL, COMMON)
29
Multi-Way Switchgear Controller ETR606
5.6.3. Other Control Parts
BATT TEST Button
Battery test is operated by pushing the
Battery Test Button. The test is maintained
for
5
seconds
automatically
monitoring
battery and charging way of switchgear. If
the button is pushed when AC power is in
normal, separate charging way of switchgear
from
battery
charging
and
examinate
current
by
battery
connecting
and
load
[BATTERY TEST MODE]
Battery Voltage
Charger Voltage
:
:
24.00 V
26.00 V
Battery Status
Charger Status
:
:
OK
OK
▲▼Move, ⬤MainMenu [SEL/COM]
<Figure 5-10> Battery Test
Monitor Screen
resistance to battery.
The test result shall be checked in battery lamp and charging way of
switchgear's lamp. In addition, indicate battery voltage and charging way of
switchgear voltage in LCD screen as shown in drawing "<Figure 5-10> Battery
Test Monitor Screen" at above.
- Battery Voltage : Indicate battery voltage.
- Charger Voltage : Indicate charging way of switchgear voltage.
- Battery Status : Displays the battery status.
Ÿ
OK : Battery voltage is in normal state. In case of default PLC and
settings, battery voltage should be higher than 22 V.
Ÿ
LOW : Battery voltage is in low state. In case of default PLC and settings,
battery voltage should be lower than 22 V.
Ÿ
NO BATT : Battery is not connected.
- Charger Status : Displays the charge circuit status.
Ÿ
OK : Charger voltage is in normal state. In case of default PLC and
settings, charger voltage should be higher than 23 V.
Ÿ
LOW : Charger voltage low is in low state. In case of default PLC and
settings, charger voltage should be lower than 23 V.
30
Multi-Way Switchgear Controller ETR606
6. LCD CONTROL MANUAL
6.1. LCD Screen
5 inch LCD which has back-light support. It is used to operate conveniently and
to check operation status clearly.
6.2. Control Keys
LCD control key is composed of 4 basic keys(UP, DOWN, FUN, ENT) and CIRCUIT
SELECT and COMMON key. The following is an instruction of key’s function.
[Table 6-1] LCD Control Button
Key
Description
[FUN]
From initial screen, it changes to menu selection mode and in the submenu of
each menu it is used as a function to go to the menu before. If pressed in the
Main Menu, it is used to change to the initial screen mode. If this key operates
when setting value is changed, all the changed values will return to the original
value set before.
[ENT]
[ UP ]
[DOWN]
SEL
[1~6 WAY]
COM
It is used for selecting menu and changing the set value. In the menu selecting
screen, it operates as a menu selecting function and when the set value is
changed, it changes to menu changing mode in the relevant value's change mode
(it operates in toggle method when changing the menu select/setting).
It is used to move the menu up or increase the set value. All the menu is made
as a structure that moves to the bottom location of the menu if in the top location
of the menu since it has a rotation selection function. This function is also applied
when changing set value so the key set value is selected after changing the top
set value. User can go to the next page from the initial screen.
It is used to move the menu to the bottom or decrease the set value. The
rotation selection function is applied for this button too, just like the [UP] key,
when changing the menu/ set value. User can go to the next page from the initial
screen.
Choose 1 way from the 6 way. If this key is pressed, it changes to the initial
screen of the chosen circuit.
※. NOTE ) The changed value does not get saved if this key is pressed when
changing the set value.
It moves to the common initial screen.
※. NOTE ) The changed value does not get saved if this button is pressed when
changing the set value.
[COMMON]
※. NOTE ) If control panel is awaken from sleep mode using control keys, it must be set to “KEY”
or “BOTH” in setting menu “Main Menu / Global Settings / General / Device / Panel
Sleep / Awake Method”.
31
Multi-Way Switchgear Controller ETR606
6.3. LCD Menu Structure Tree
Ÿ
Menu is composed of common menu and circuit menu for each way of
switchgear (CB Control Part / SW Control Part).
Ÿ
The screen structure of each menu is composed of initial screen and menu
screen.
Ÿ
The initial screen and all menus are composed of rotation method.
Ÿ
The menu screen is composed of setting, event management and measurement
menu.
6.3.1. Menu Tree Structure for Switch Part(SW)
[INITIAL SCREEN]
UP DOWN
ENT
Initial Screen 1
FUN
[MAIN MENU]
Initial Screen 2
1. Group Settings
Initial Screen 3
1. Primary
1. Fault Indication
Initial Screen 4
1. FI Type
2. Pickup Current
2. Alternate
3. FI Delay Time
4. Inrush Restraint
5. Direction
6. FI Auto Reset
2. Monitoring
1. Live Line
2. Phase Difference
3. Auto Section
2. Event
3. Open Phase
4. Operation Count
1. Load&Energy/Min
5. Contact Wear
2. Load&Energy/Hour
3. Load&Energy/Day
3. Maintenance
4. Clear Saved Data
1. Load & Energy
1. Count
1. Operation
2. Fault
2. Contact Wear
3. Data Reset
1. Operation Count
2. Fault Count
4. Status
5. Metering
3. Count All
1. Current
2. Voltage
3. Power
4. Count Wear
5. Energy
6. Above All
4. Energy
5. Demand
<Figure 6-1> Circuit Menu Tree Structure for Switch Part(SW)
32
Multi-Way Switchgear Controller ETR606
6.3.2. Menu Tree Structure for Circuit Breaker Part(CB)
[INITIAL SCREEN]
UP DOWN
ENT
Initial Screen 1
FUN
[MAIN MENU]
Initial Screen 2
1. Group Settings
Initial Screen 3
1. Primary
1. Protection
Initial Screen 4
1. Auto Reclosing
2. 51P: TIME OC-PHA
3. 51G: TIME OC-GND
2. Alternate
4. 51Q: TIME OC-NEQ
5. 50P: INST OC-PHA
6. 50G: INST OC-GND
7. 50Q: INST OC-NEQ
8. Inrush Restraint
9.Direction
10.Voltage
11.Frequency
12.User Curve
13.FI Auto Reset
2. Event
1. Load&Energy/Min
2. Load&Energy/Hour
2. Monitoring
3. Load&Energy/Day
1. Live Line
2. Phase Difference
3. Open Phase
4. Clear Saved Data
1. Load & Energy
1. Count
1. Operation
4. Operation Count
5. Contact Wear
3. Maintenance
2. Fault
2. Contact Wear
3. Data Reset
1. Operation Count
2. Fault Count
4. Status
5. Metering
3. Count All
1. Current
2. Voltage
3. Power
4. Count Wear
5. Energy
6. Above All
4. Energy
5. Demand
<Figure 6-2> Circuit Menu Tree Structure for Circuit Breaker Part(CB)
33
Multi-Way Switchgear Controller ETR606
6.3.3. Common Menu Tree Structure
[ INITIAL SCREEN ]
UP DOWN
ENT
Initial Screen 1
FUN
[ MAIN MENU ]
Initial Screen 2
1. Global Settings
Initial Screen 3
Initial Screen 4
1. General
Initial Screen 5
1. System
Initial Screen 6
Initial Screen 7
1. Power Line
2. Current Sensing
3. Voltage Sensing
2. Event Redcorder
3. Monitoring
1. Control Type
1. Power Line
2. Current Sensing
3. Voltage Sensing
4. ALTS Control
1. Logic Timer
5. Passcode
2. Pulse Timer
3. IN/OUT Ports
6. PLC
4. Latch Logic
3. Operation Time
4. H/W Option
5. LCD Display
6. Panel Sleep
7. Time Zone
8. RMS Compensation
9. Others
7. Device
2. Communication
2. Active Set Group
10. Factory Debug
1. Protocols
1. DNP3
1. DNP3 Slave 1
2. DNP3 Slave 2
3. Common
2. IEC60870-5
1. IEC60870-5-101
3. MODBUS
2. IEC60870-5-104
4. IEC61850
3. Common
5. SNTP
6. SNMP
7. ETIMS
2. Ports
1. RS232-1 Port
3. Dialup Modem
1. RS232-1 Modem
2. RS232-2 Port
4. FTP-SSL
2. RS232-2 Modem
3. RS485-1 Port
4. RS485-2 Port
5. WIFI
6. Event&Etc.
2. Event
1. Operation
2. Fault
3. Fault Wave
4. System
5. Set Change
6. Diagnostic
3. Maintenance
4. Status
1. Operation
2. Fault
3. Fault Wave
4. System
5. Set Change
6. Diagnostic
7. Clear Saved Data
7. Above All
1. Count
1. Control Count
2. Data Reset
1. Control Count
3. Controller Information
2. Count All
3. Communication Buffer
1. ETR606 STATUS
4. Above All
2. INPUT PORTS
3. OUTPUT PORTS
5. Metering
1. Frequency
2. DC Channel
3. Control Reference
<Figure 6-3> Common Menu Tree Structure
34
5. Ethernet1 Port
6. Ethernet2 Port
7. Ethernet Option
Multi-Way Switchgear Controller ETR606
6.4. Initial Screen
The main information of ETR606 is indicated in initial screen so that user can
easily approach and understand it.
Ÿ
Initial screen is composed of circuit initial screen and common initial screen.
Ÿ
It moves to relevant initial screen if [SEL] or [COMMON] key are pressed.
Ÿ
Press [▲][▼] key to move to selected initial screen.
Ÿ
It moves to main menu if [FUN] key is pressed in initial screen.
6.4.1. Common Initial Screen
Ÿ
Common Initial Screen consists of 4 modifiable and 3 fixed screens.
Ÿ
In order to edit those 4 modifiable screens user can go to the "HMI LINE
EDITOR" menu in ETIMS Interface Software. Please refer to the ETIMS
Interface Software manual for more details.
The initial screens below are in the default configuration, those can be
Ÿ
modified upon user's request.
[Table 6-2] Common Initial Screen (1/3)
Initial Screen - Common
MULTI-WAY CONTROL ETR606
SW
1W
CB
2W
CB
3W
CB
4W
CB
5W
SW
Initial Screen 1 – Modifiable Screen
This modifiable diagram displays the main body
configuration, the closing/opening status of each
circuit, and the earth status.
6W
▲▼Move, ●MainMenu [SEL/COM]
MULTI-WAY CONTROL ETR606
IA[A]
IB[A]
IC[A]
IG[A]
1W
0
2W
0
0
0
0
0
0
3W
0
0
0
0
0
4W
0
0
0
0
5W
0
0
0
0
6W
0
0
0
0
Initial Screen 2 – Modifiable Screen
This modifiable screen displays the current metering
values of all the circuits(A, B, C Phase and Ground).
▲▼Move, ●MainMenu [SEL/COM]
MULTI-WAY CONTROL ETR606
VA[kV]
VB[kV]
VC[kV]
1W
0.00
0.00
0 .00
2W
0.00
0 .00
0 .00
3W
0.00
0 .00
0 .00
4W
0.00
0 .00
0 .00
5W
0.00
0 .00
0 .00
6W
0.00
0 .00
0 .00
▲▼Move, ●MainMenu [SEL/COM]
35
Initial Screen 3 – Modifiable Screen
This modifiable screen displays the voltage metering
values of all the circuits(A, B and C Phase).
Multi-Way Switchgear Controller ETR606
[Table 6-2] Common Initial Screen (2/3)
Initial Screen - Common
MULTI-WAY CONTROL ETR606
1W S/W
52A
LIVE LINE
EARTH
2W C/B
52A
LIVE LINE
EARTH
3W C/B
52A
LIVE LINE
EARTH
4W C/B
52A
LIVE LINE
EARTH
5W C/B
52A
LIVE LINE
EARTH
6W S/W
52A
LIVE LINE
EARTH
▲▼Move, ●MainMenu [SEL/COM]
Initial Screen 4 – Modifiable Screen
This modifiable screen shows the following status of
all the circuits.
n 52A : Displays the main contact status of each
circuit. The lamp turns on when the main contact
status is "Close".
n Live Line : Displays the live line status of each
circuit. The lamp turns on when the distribution
line is in "Live Line" state.
n EARTH : Displays the earth status of each circuit.
The lamp turns on when the eart status is
"Close".
< CONTROLLER INFORMATION >
Initial Screen 5 – Fixed Screen
MPU : V1.0
DSP : V1.0
This screen displays the version of ETR606.
CPU : V1.0
HMI : V1.0
PKG : V1.0 2021-09-01
O/S : #281 2017-10-20
FPGA: Ver. 1000
▲▼Move, ●MainMenu [SEL/COM]
< GPS/IRIG MODULE INFO. >
Module Status[LINK SUCCESS]
G.M.T
Local
09/01/2021
09/01/2021
>>LAT: NORTH
>>LNG: EAST
00:00:00
09:00:00
37˚ 12'
126˚ 57'
31"
48"
▲▼Move, ●MainMenu [SEL/COM]
Initial Screen 6 – Fixed Screen
This screen displays IRIG/GPS related with time
synchronization.
n Module Status : This screen displays time
synchronization information.
- LINK SUCCESS: Time synchronization device is
well installed.
- LINK
FAIL:
The
connection
of
time
synchronization is not normal.
- NOT INSTALL: Time synchronization device is
not installed.
n G.M.T : This screen displays UTC (Universal
Time Coordinated) time.
n Local : This screen displays Local Time.
n LAT : This screen displays latitude received from
time synchronization device.
n LNG : This screen displays longtitude received
from time synchronization device.
*. NOTE)
If time synchronization device is not installed or at
link fail, local Information (latitude, longtitude) is
not displayed.
36
Multi-Way Switchgear Controller ETR606
[Table 6-2] Common Initial Screen (3/3)
Initial Screen - Common
< ALTS CONTROL STATUS >
ModeTy[MANU'] I.Lock[P2BLK]
Power1[1-WAY] Power2[6-WAY]
Main.P[ NONE] Trs.St[ - ]
P1-St.[CLOSE] P2-St.[ OPEN]
P1-Vol[ DEAD] P2-Vol[ LIVE]
P1-A.T[ - ] P2-A.T[ - ]
P1-O.P[ - ] P2-O.P[ - ]
P1-P.D[ - ] P2-P.D[ - ]
Flt.St[ - ] Flt.Bk[ - ]
▲▼Move, ●MainMenu [SEL/COM]
37
Initial Screen 7 – Fixed Screen
Displays the operation information of ALTS Control.
n ModeTy : Displays operation mode of ALTS
Control function.
- MANU’ : Manual operation mode.
- AUTO : Automatic transfer operation mode.
n I.Lock : This screen displays the interlock status.
- P1BLK : Close block status of power source 1.
- P2BLK : Close block status of power source 2.
n Power1, Power2 : Display the switchgear's way
selected for each power source
- Power1 is fixed to 1-Way.
- Power2 can be selected between 2-Way to
6-Way (or 4-Way).
n Main.P : Display the selected main power source
- NONE : Main power is not selected.
- POW1 : Main power is power source 1.
- POW2 : Main power is power source 2.
n Trs.St : Display the power transfer status and
only displayed when the AUTO mode active
- POW1 : Transfer power active is power 1.
- POW2 : Transfer power active is power 2,
n P1-St., P2-St. : Display the 52A contact status of
the selected switchgear's way (OPEN/CLOSE).
n P1-Vol, P2-Volt : Display the line voltage status
of each power source (LINE/DEAD).
n P1-A.T, P2-A.T : Display the automatic load
transfer operation on each power source.
- RUN : Automatically transferring from active
transfer power to standby (secondary) power.
n P1-O.P, P2-O.P : Display the open phase status
of each power source.
n P1-P.D, P2-P.D : Display the phase difference
(DIFF') status of each power source.
n Flt.St : Display the fault status.
- P.U : Current fault pickup status
- F.I : Fault indication status (determine the fault
type next)
- T-Flt : Temporary fault status
- P-Flt : Permanent fault status
n Flt.Bk : Display the automatic transfer operation
is in block status due to a fault.
- Temporary fault, the block is automatically reset
- Permanent fault, the block status will remain
until the FI Reset command is performed
Multi-Way Switchgear Controller ETR606
6.4.2. Circuit Initial Screen
Circuit initial screen consists of 4 screens, and the 4th screen can vary
Ÿ
depending on the controller type(C/B or S/W).
[Table 6-3] Circuit Initial Screen (1/3)
Initial Screen - Circuit
< 1-WAY INFORMATION >
Controller Type [S/W-TYPE]
Active Set Group [ PRIMARY]
52 Contact Status[
CLOSE]
Line Volt' Status[LIVELINE]
1Way Earth Status[
OPEN]
Mechanism Status[
FREE]
Close Oper'Block [
NONE]
Open Oper'Block [
NONE]
▲▼Move, ●MainMenu [SEL/COM]
< 1-WAY METERING >
IA:00000A ∠ 000˚ PA:0.00MVA
IB:00000A ∠ 000˚ PB:0.00MVA
IC:00000A ∠ 000˚ PC:0.00MVA
IG:00000A ∠ 000˚ P3:0.00MVA
VA:00.00kV∠ 000˚ PfA:
0%
VB:00.00kV∠ 000˚ PfB:
0%
VC:00.00kV∠ 000˚ PfC:
0%
Pf3:
0%
▲▼Move, ●MainMenu [SEL/COM]
38
Initial Screen 1
This screen displays the status information of the
selected circuit.
n Controller Type : Shows the controller type.
n Active Set Group : It displays the currently
applied SET GROUP of circuit.
n 52 Contact Status : It displays the status of
circuit’s main contact.
- CLOSE : Displays main contact is closed.
- OPEN : Displays main contact is opened.
- TROUBLE : It is displayed in case of Contact
status is incorrect or cable connection is not
completed.
- Line Volt’ Status : Displays the voltage
status(Live Line or Dead Line)
n Way Earth Status : Displays the earth status(Close
or Open)
n Mechanism Status : Displays the mechanism status
of the circuit body(Lock or Free)
n Close Oper’Block and Open Oper’Block : Displays
the block status of the close and open operation
of each circuit.
- NONE : Indicates normal operating condition.
- BLOCK : Indicates the operation is blocked.
Initial Screen 2
Displays the metering values of the selected circuit.
n IA, IB, IC, IG : Displays the A, B, C Phase and
Ground current values of the selected circuit.
n VA, VB, VC : Displays the A, B and C Phase
voltage values of the selected circuit.
n PA, PB, PC, P3 : Displays the apparent power of
each phase and 3-Phase of the selected circuit.
n PfA, PfB, PfC, Pf3 : Displays the power factor of
each phase and 3-Phase of the selected circuit.
Multi-Way Switchgear Controller ETR606
[Table 6-3] Circuit Initial Screen (2/3)
Initial Screen - Circuit
< 1-WAY METERING >
IA:00000A ∠ 000˚ PA:0.00MVA
IB:00000A ∠ 000˚ PB:0.00MVA
IC:00000A ∠ 000˚ PC:0.00MVA
IG:00000A ∠ 000˚ P3:0.00MVA
AB:00.00kV∠ 000˚ PfA:
0%
BC:00.00kV∠ 000˚ PfB:
0%
CA:00.00kV∠ 000˚ PfC:
0%
Pf3:
0%
▲▼Move, ●MainMenu [SEL/COM]
< 1-W AUTO SECTION STAUS >
Section Function[
AT Restore Func.[
DISABLE]
]
Section
Status[
]
52Contact Status[
CLOSE]
Line Volt Status[LIVE-LINE]
Operation Status[
]
L.O Timer Opera'[
]
▲▼Move, ●MainMenu [SEL/COM]
39
Initial Screen 3
Displays the metering values of the selected circuit.
n IA, IB, IC, IG : Displays the A, B, C Phase and
Ground current values of the selected circuit.
n AB, BC, CA : Displays the Phase-to-phase
Voltage of AB, BC and CA of the selected circuit.
n PA, PB, PC, P3 : Displays the apparent power of
each phase and 3-Phase of the selected circuit.
n PfA, PfB, PfC, Pf3 : Displays the power factor of
each phase and 3-Phase of the selected circuit.
Initial Screen 4 (S/W Controller Type)
Displays the operation information of Auto Section
function for selected circuit.
n Section Function : Displays the setup status of
Auto Section Function(DISABLE or ENABLE).
n AT Resotre Func. : Displays the setup status of
Auto Restoration(Auto Close) Function(DISABLE or
ENABLE).
n Section Status : Displays the status of Auto
Secton function .
- RUNNING : auto section operation is in progress.
- LOCK-OUT : auto section operation is finished.
n 52 Contact Status : It displays the status of
circuit’s main contact(CLOSE, OPEN or TROUBLE).
n Line Volt’ Status : Displays the voltage status of
the circuit(Live Line or Dead Line).
n Operation Status : Displays the status of Auto Section.
- OPENING : After detecting dead line, it is the
standby status for open operation order by auto
section function.
- REST'WAIT : Waiting status for the live line to
be returned after section open operation.
- CLOSING : After the restoration of Live line, it
is the standby status for close operation order
by auto section function.
n L.O Timer Opera’ : Displays the operation status
of the Lock-out timer of Auto Section function.
- RUNNING : Timer is running for lockout operation
- RESETING : After the lock-out operation, auto
reset is in progress due to live line restoration.
Multi-Way Switchgear Controller ETR606
[Table 6-3] Circuit Initial Screen (3/3)
Initial Screen - Circuit
< 1W AUTO RECLOSING STAUS >
Auto Reclose Func[ DISABLE]
L.O Operation Set[
]
Trip Sequence No.[
]
79Sequence Status[
]
52 Contact Status[
CLOSE]
Cycle Reset Stat'[
]
L-Out Reset Stat'[
]
▲▼Move, ●MainMenu [SEL/COM]
40
Initial Screen 4 (C/B Controller Type)
Displays the operation related information of Auto
Reclosing function.
n Auto Reclose Func : Displays the setup status of
Auto Reclosing Function(DISABLE or ENABLE).
n L.O Operation Set : Displays the total number of
operation setting for Lock-out (1~4 shot).
n Trip Sequence No. : Displays the current number
of trip operation information.
n 79Sequnce Status : Displays the current Auto
Reclosing sequence operation status. (RESET,
CYCLE or LOCK-OUT)
n 52 Contact Status : It displays the status of
circuit’s main contact(CLOSE, OPEN or TROUBLE).
n Cycle Reset Stat’ : It is under this status when
the fault is cleared during 79 Cycle.
- RUNNING: After clearing the fault current, reset
timer is running to make auto reset.
n L-Out Rest Stat’ : It is under this status when
L-out is being reset.
- RUNNING: Reset timer is running to make auto
reset after manual close.
Multi-Way Switchgear Controller ETR606
6.5. Configuration of the Menu Screen
Menu Screen consists of Menu Title, Menu and Help Message.
[POWER LINE]
>Frequency :
Phase Combination:
Phase Rotation:
← Menu Title
60
abc
ABC
[ 50~60 : 10 Hz]
▲▼Move, ■Select, ●Return
← Menu Content
← Setting Range
← Help Message
<Figure 6-4> Menu Screen
Ÿ
Menu Tile : Shows the title of current menu.
Ÿ
Menu Content : Shows the contents of the current menu in text format.
Ÿ
Help Message : Shows the available menu control key and the key control to
be able to be used in the current menu.
Ÿ
41
Setting Range : Shows the range and step of the selected setting menu.
Multi-Way Switchgear Controller ETR606
6.6. Setting Example
Let's change the System Frequency as an example. The procedure is as below;
[Table 6-4] Setting Change Procedure
Main Menu (Common) / Global Settings / General / System / Power Line
[POWER LINE]
>Frequency :
Phase Combination:
Phase Rotation:
60
abc
ABC
Go to the Common Main Menu by pressing [FUN]
key from the Common Initial Screen.
By using the [ENT] key, go to the “Main Menu /
Global Settings / General / System / Power Line”
menu.
[ 50~60 : 10 Hz]
▲▼Move, ■Select, ●Return
After moving the cursor to the Frequency setting
as shown in the left picture, press the [ENT] key
to change to edit mode.
Change the setting value by using [▲][▼] and
[ENT] keys.
The changed setting value will be applied if the
[ENT] key is pressed when the cursor is located
at the far right in the edit mode.
Press the [FUN] key from the edit mode if the
user doesn't want to apply the changes.
※. NOTE ) The changed value will only be applied to the Controller ETR606
after going through the “Setting Save” procedure.
42
Multi-Way Switchgear Controller ETR606
6.7. Settings Save
The changed value will only be applied to the Controller ETR606 after going
through the “Settings Save” procedure. Setting Save message will pop up if the
user enters the “*. Save Settings” menu or go back to the previous menu.
Setting Save procedure is as follows;
[Table 6-5] Settings Save Procedure
Main Menu (Common) / Global Settings / General / *.Save Settings
①
① To save a changed set value, press [ENT] key.
SETTING CHANGED
Press <ENT>
to SAVE (UP/DOWN)
②
② Enter Passcode and press [ENT] key. If
Passcode is correct, ③ screen appears;
otherwise ② screen appears again.
Passcode 1 is applied when changing General
Global settings and Group Settings, and
Passcode 2 is applied when communication
setting is changed.
ENTER PASSCODE 1
0000
③ If the changed value is set successfully, ③
screen is displayed for short period.
If there is no change value and select “*. SAVE
SETTINGS”, then, screen ④ is displayed.
③
* SAVE SETTING *
!! SUCCESS !!
④
* NOTHING CHANGED *
⑤
SETTING CHANGED
Press <ENT>
to ABORT (UP/DOWN)
43
If you do not want to save changed setting value,
please go to ① screen through [▲][▼] key and
to ⑤ screen [ENT] key.
Multi-Way Switchgear Controller ETR606
7. COMMON MAIN MENU
When [FUN] key is pressed in common initial screen, it moves to main menu
and if it is pressed in main menu, it moves to initial screen. The main menu has
submenus below.
[MAIN MENU]
>1.Global Settings
2.Event
3.Maintenance
4.Time
5.Status
6.Metering
▲▼Move, ■Select, ●Return
[ LCD Screen ] Common Main Menu Screen
7.1. Global Settings
From the main menu place the cursor in “GLOBAL SETTINGS”, press [ENT]
key, it will move to GLOBAL SETTINGS. This menu consists of “GENERAL”
menu and “COMMUNICATION” menu.
[GLOBAL SETTINGS]
>1.General
2.Communication
▲▼Move, ■Select, ●Return
[ LCD Screen ] Global Setting Menu Screen
44
Multi-Way Switchgear Controller ETR606
7.1.1. General Settings
This menu is to set general setting required to operate switchgear’s controller
ETR606, and Sub-menu consists of below picture.
[GENERAL]
>1.System
2.Event Recorder
3.Monitoring
4.ALTS Control
5.Passcode
6.PLC
7.Device
*.Save Settings
▲▼Move, ■Select, ●Return
[ LCD Screen ] General Setting Menu Screen
Caution : Changed set valued must be saved to be applied. When escaping
from "*. SAVE SETTINGS" menu or moving to high menu, changed
set value is saved by 'Changed set value saved message'.
7.1.1.1. SYSTEM
Place the cursor on “SYSTEM” in GENERAL menu, press [ENT] key, it is moved
to this menu. In this menu, elements related with SYSTEM, are set and it has
sub-menu as below.
[SYSTEM]
>1.Power Line
2.Current Sensing
3.Voltage Sensing
▲▼Move, ■Select, ●Return
[ LCD Screen ] System Setting Menu Screen
Caution : This setting change may influence metering and whole system,
precaution is requested.
45
Multi-Way Switchgear Controller ETR606
(1) POWER LINE
It moves to this menu if [ENT] key is pressed after locating cursor in "1.
POWER LINE" in 'SYSTEM' menu. Set power system information where ETR606
is installed.
[POWER LINE]
>Frequency :
Phase Combination:
Phase Rotation:
60
abc
ABC
[ 50~60 : 10 Hz]
▲▼Move, ■Select, ●Return
[ LCD Screen ] POWER LINE Setting Menu Screen
1) Frequency
Range
50, 60 ㎐
Default
60
Step
10
n Select nominal power system frequency. This value is used as a
default to set optimal digital sampling rate.
n It is set before product delivery in accordance with specifications.
※. NOTE ) The default value of this setting can vary according to the
option type.
2) Phase Combination
Range
abc, cab, bca, acb, bac, cba
Default
abc
Step
-
n Put real phase of power system to a bushing or a terminal of a
control device. As example, if setting value is cab, it means that
bushing A is connected with phase C, bushing B is connected with
phase A and bushing C is connected with phase B.
46
Multi-Way Switchgear Controller ETR606
Switchgear
Busing Terminal
C
B
A
Line Feeding Case :
1
2
3
4
5
6
c
b
a
b
c
a
b
a
c
c
a
b
a
c
b
a
b
c
<Figure 7-1> Phase Connection
[Table 7-1] Phase selection according to Phase Combination
Line feeding
Recommend Setting
Phase Mapping Result
Bushing Terminal
Phase Combination
LCD/INDEX Display :
Voltage / Current
Bushing/
Controller Terminal
Case 1 :
abc
Va / Ia
VA / IA
Vb / Ib
VB / IB
Vc / Ic
VC / IC
Va / Ia
Vb / Ib
VB / IB
VC / IC
Vc / Ic
VA / IA
Va / Ia
VC / IC
Vb / Ib
Vc / Ic
VA / IA
VB / IB
Va / Ia
VA / IA
ABC
Vb / Ib
VC / IC
cba
Vc / Ic
Va / Ia
VB / IB
VB / IB
Vb / Ib
VA / IA
Vc / Ic
VC / IC
Va / Ia
Vb / Ib
VC / IC
VB / IB
Vc / Ic
VA / IA
abc
ABC
Case 2 :
Case 3 :
cab
ABC
cab
bca
bca
ABC
Case 4 :
Case 5 :
acb
acb
cba
ABC
Case 6 :
bac
ABC
bac
3) Phase Rotation
Range
ABC, ACB
Default
ABC
Step
-
n Select phase rotation of power system.
n According to this setting, positive sequence voltage/current(V1, I1) and
negative sequence voltage/current(V2, I2) are applied in reverse. It
means the settings change positions for one another.
47
Multi-Way Switchgear Controller ETR606
(2) CURRENT SENSING
It moves to this menu if [ENT] key is pressed after locating cursor in "2.
CURRENT SENSING" in 'SYSTEM' menu. Current sensing characteristics of each
circuit of the switchgear can be changed from this menu. This setting is critical
for the proper operation of all the overcurrent protection and fault indicating
functions. So, this setting should be changed according to the characteristics of
the switchgear.
[CURRENT SENSING]
>Phase CT1-Ratio:
1000
Ground CT1-Ratio:
1000
Phase CT2-Ratio:
1000
Ground CT2-Ratio:
1000
:
:
Phase CT6-Ratio:
1000
Ground CT6-Ratio:
1000
Phase CT1-Polari＇: FORWARD
Ground CT1-Polari＇: FORWARD
Phase CT2-Polari＇: FORWARD
Ground CT2-Polari＇: FORWARD
:
:
Phase CT6-Polari＇: FORWARD
Ground CT6-Polari＇: FORWARD
[ 1~2000 : 1]
▲▼Move, ■Select, ●Return
[ LCD Screen ] CURRENT SENSING Setting Menu Screen
1) Phase CT#-Ratio
Range
1 ~ 2000
Default
1000
Step
1
n Set phase CT# ratio (# means the number of switchgear’s way).
n The 1st conversion current is indicated as multiple of CT Ratio and
2nd Phase input current.
2) Ground CT#-Ratio
Range
1 ~ 5000
Default
1000
Step
1
n Set Ground CT# ratio (# means the number of switchgear’s way).
n The 1st conversion current is indicated as multiple of Ground CT Ratio
and 2nd Ground input current.
48
Multi-Way Switchgear Controller ETR606
3) Phase CT# Polari'
Range
FORWARD, REVERSE
Default
FORWARD
Step
-
n Select phase CT# pole direction (# means the number of switchgear’s
way).
4) Ground CT# Polari'
Range
FORWARD, REVERSE
Default
FORWARD
Step
-
n Select ground CT# pole direction (# means the number of switchgear’s
way).
(3) VOLTAGE SENSING
It moves to this menu if [ENT] key is pressed after locating cursor in "3.
VOLTAGE SENSING" in 'SYSTEM' menu. Voltage sensing(VT) characteristics of
each circuit of the switchgear can be changed from this menu. With Line VTs
installed,
ETR606
can
be
used
to
perform
voltage
measurements,
power
calculations, live line/dead line detection and directional control of over-current
elements and so on.
[VOLTAGE SENSING]
>VT Connection Type:
WYE
VT Rated(P-P):
22.86
VT Ratio:
3300.0
[ NONE/WYE/DELTA ]
▲▼Move, ■Select, ●Return
[ LCD Screen ] VOLTAGE SENSING Setting Menu Screen
49
Multi-Way Switchgear Controller ETR606
1) VT Connection Type
Range
NONE, WYE, DELTA
Default
WYE
Step
-
n Select voltage connector.
n NONE : VT non installed. Select NONE if Voltage Sensing item is not used.
n WYE : If Voltage Connect type of 1V is Y type, select WYE.
n DELTA : If Voltage Connect type of 1V is Δ-type, select DELTA.
2) VT Rated(P-P)
Range
3.00~38.00kV
Default
22.86
Step
0.01kV
n Enter the primary rated voltage(kV) of VT.
n This
setting
refers
to
primary
rated
voltage
in
the
line
voltage(phase-to-phase).
3) VT Ratio
Range
10.0 ~ 6500.0
Default
3300.0
Step
0.1
n Enter VT Ratio.
n The 1st conversion voltage is indicated as multiple of VT Ratio and
2nd VT input voltage.
50
Multi-Way Switchgear Controller ETR606
7.1.1.2. EVENT RECORDER
Place the cursor on “EVENT RECORDER” in GENERAL menu, press [ENT]
button to move into this menu. Waveform, Event Recorder, and its related
elements are set in this menu.
[EVENT RECORDER]
>Wave Record :
ON
Wave Sample Rate:
32
Wave Pre-Cycle:
20
Wave P/S:
P(1ST)
L&E Record:
ON
L&E Interval:
15
COMFEDE Record:
OFF
COMTRADE Record:
ON
COMTRADE Revision:
1999
COMTRADE P/S:
P(1ST)
COMTRADE Rate:
1
[ OFF/ON ]
▲▼Move, ■Select, ●Return
[ LCD Screen ] Event Recorder Menu Screen
1) Wave Record
Range
ON, OFF
Default
ON
Step
-
n Set whether to use wave recorder function.
n When this setting is OFF, fault cycle will not register any information.
2) Wave Sample Rate
Range
16, 32 sample
Default
32 sample
Step
-
n Select a number of sampling for wave capture.
n Number of cycle varies on the number of sampling selection. Captured
wave cycle is 120 cycles if 32 sampling is applied and Captured wave
cycle is 240 cycles if 16 sampling is applied
3) Wave Pre-Cycle
Range
1 ~ 40 cycle
Default
20
Step
51
1 cycle
Multi-Way Switchgear Controller ETR606
n Pre-cycle is to record(capture) a number of wave cycle before trigger
occurring.
n This setting is applied when the wave sample rate is set to 32
samples (default). In case of 16 samples, the actual pre-cycle is
applied twice of this setting.
4) Wave P/S
Range
P(1ST), S(2ND)
Default
P(1ST)
Step
-
n Select if analog data value is primary data or secondary data recorded
on Wave cycle.
n Record the current and voltage data applied to setting value ETR606
on secondary side (the CT ratio and VT ratio divided by the primary
side data).
5) L&E Record
Range
OFF, ON
Default
ON
Step
-
n Set whether Load&Energy event is recorded or not.
6) L&E Interval
Range
5, 10, 15, 20, 30, 60
Default
15
Step
-
n Set the interval to record Load&Energy events.
7) COMFEDE Record
Range
OFF, ON
Default
OFF
Step
-
n When occurring event, configure if it will be saved on COMFEDE
format (Common Format for Event Data Exchange) format file of
ETR606.
n COMFEDE file recorded in ETR606 can be downloaded by file transfer
protocol function.
52
Multi-Way Switchgear Controller ETR606
8) COMTRADE Record
Range
OFF, ON
Default
ON
Step
-
n In case of occuring a fault, set COMTRADE (Common Format for
Transient Data Exchange) format file in ETR606.
n The COMTRADE file recorded in ETR606 can be downloaded by the
file transfer protocol function.
9) COMTRADE Revision
Range
1999, 2013
Default
1999
Step
-
n Select version of COMTRADE file.
10) COMTRADE P/S
Range
P(1ST), S(2ND)
Default
P(1ST)
Step
-
n Select whether the analog data value recorded in the COMTRADE file
is primary or secondary data.
11) COMTRADE Rate
Range
1~10
Default
1
Step
1
n Sets the rate of the analog data value recorded to the COMTRADE
file.
n Record the value divided by the analog data into the COMTRADE file.
53
Multi-Way Switchgear Controller ETR606
7.1.1.3. MONITORING
Place the cursor on “MONITERING” in GENERAL menu, press [ENT] button to
move into this menu.
[MONITERING]
>1.Battery Load Test
2.Battery Management
3.DC Monitor
▲▼Move, ■Select, ●Return
[ LCD Screen ] Monitoring Menu Screen
(1) BATTERY LOAD TEST
Place the cursor on “BATTERY LOAD TEST” in MONITORING menu, press
[ENT] button to move into this menu.
ETR606 provides an periodical automatic battery load test function to check the
battery status, and the settings related to that can be set from this menu.
[BATTERY LOAD TEST]
>Test Period:
1 DAY
Reference Time:
12PM
[0(OFF), 1 HOUR~30 DAYS]
▲▼Move, ■Select, ●Return
[ LCD Screen ] Battery Load Test Menu Screen
1) Test Period
Range
0(OFF), 1 hour ~ 30 days
Default
1 day
Step
~
n Set a time period for automatic battery load test.
n Automatic battery load test is not performed if it is turned OFF.
54
Multi-Way Switchgear Controller ETR606
2) Reference Time
Range
00AM ~ 23PM
Default
12PM
Step
~
n Set a reference time for automatic battery load test.
n Do automatic test following this setting. For example, in the case of
test period as 1 day, it will do automatic test every 1 day. In the case
of test period as 2 hours, it will do automatic test every 2 hours.
(2) BATTERY MANAGEMENT
Place the cursor on “BATTERY MANAGEMENT” in MONITORING menu, press
[ENT] button to move into this menu.
The ETR606 has a battery management function that calculates and manages the
battery capacity using the charge time and discharge time of the set battery.
However, for correct battery capacity calculation, charge time and discharge time
should be set for the installed battery.
In addition, it’s possible to monitor alarm about battery capacity and battery
voltage according to ETR606 user setting.
[BATTERY MANAGEMENT]
>Function:
DISABLE
Charge Time:
780
Discharge Time:
1440
Alarm Level:
50.00
Capacity Reset:
100.00
[ DISABLE/ENABLE ]
▲▼Move, ■Select, ●Return
[ LCD Screen ] Battery Management Menu Screen
1) Function
Range
DISABLE, ENABLE
Default
DISABLE
Step
~
n Set whether to monitor the battery capacity.
n If set to ENABLE, if the battery capacity is less than the "Alarm
Level" setting value, "“BCAPLOW(Battery Capacity Low)” event occurs.
55
Multi-Way Switchgear Controller ETR606
2) Charge Time
Range
60~6000 min.
Default
780 min.
Step
1 min.
n Sets the time at which the fully discharged battery (0%) will be fully
charged.
3) Discharge Time
Range
60~6000 min.
Default
1440 min.
Step
1 min.
n Sets the time at which the fully discharged battery (0%) will be fully
charged.
4) Alarm Level
Range
0.00 ~ 100.00 %
Default
50.00
Step
0.01 %
n Set the battery capacity monitoring level.
n If battery capacity is less than this set value, “BCAPLOW(Battery
Capacity Low)” event occurs.
5) Capacity Reset
Range
0.00 ~ 100.00 %
Default
100.00
Step
0.01 %
n Set the battery capacity reset value.
n After this setting, it can reset battery capacity using “MAIN MENU /
MAINENANCE / DATA RESET / COUNT ALL”.
n When the battery is replaced, it should be reset to the capacity for
the replaced battery following the above procedure.
56
Multi-Way Switchgear Controller ETR606
(3) DC MONITOR
Place the cursor on “DC MONITOR” in MONITORING menu, press [ENT] button
to move into this menu. It sets about the transducer that can be used as a DC
analog input monitoring usage in the menu.
[DC MONITOR]
>DC1 Rate:
1
DC1 Ratio:
1
DC1 Offset:
0
DC1-1 Type:
UNDER
DC1-1 Pickup:
OFF
DC1-1 Delay:
2.00
DC1-2 Type:
OVER
DC1-2 Pickup:
OFF
DC1-2 Delay:
2.00
:
:
DC4 Rate:
1
DC4 Ratio:
1
DC4 Offset:
0
DC4-1 Type:
UNDER
DC4-1 Pickup:
23.0
DC4-1 Delay:
2.00
DC4-2 Type:
UNDER
DC4-2 Pickup:
OFF
DC4-2 Delay:
2.00
[DISABLE/ENABLE]
▲▼Move, ■Select, ●Return
[ LCD Screen ] DC Monitor Menu Screen
Ÿ
ETR606 has 4 DC analog channels for monitoring, each channel has 2
monitoring elements.
Ÿ
DC1 and DC2 channels of ETR606 are rated for 20mA, and DC3 and DC4
channels are rated for 40V.
Ÿ
DC3 and DC4 channels are pre defined for battery voltage and charger
voltage, respectively.
Ÿ
DC3-1 monitoring element is used to detect battery failure, and DC4-1
monitoring element is used to detect charger failure.
Ÿ
DC1 and DC2 channels are reserved for users.
1) DC1 Rate
Range
1~200
Default
1
Step
1
n Set DC1 monitoring range.
57
Multi-Way Switchgear Controller ETR606
2) DC1 Ratio
Range
1~3000
Default
1
Step
1
n Set the ratio DC1 input channel.
n The DC1 measurement value is the ratio × DC1 input channel input
value.
3) DC1 Offset
Range
-10000 ~ +10000
Default
0
Step
1
n Set the offset DC1 input channel.
n When calculating DC1 measurement value, calculate by applying offset
value.
4) DC1-1 Type
Range
UNDER, OVER
Default
UNDER
Step
1
n Set the alarm type (under or over) for DC1. Under setting provides
pickup and alarm when it senses under the pickup value. Over setting
provides pickup and alarm when it senses over the pickup value.
5) DC1-1 Pickup
Range
0(OFF), 0 ~ 6000.0
Default
OFF
Step
0.1
n Set DC1-1 pickup value.
n Dropout value of DC1 is ±10% of pickup value. Alarm ocurrs when
DC1-1 Type setting is UNDER and DC1 input is lower than pickup
value. And it is reset when DC1 input is higher than 110% of pickup
value.
n Alarm ocurrs when DC1-1 Type setting is OVER and DC1 input is
higher than pickup value. And it is reset when DC1 input is lower than
90% of pickup value.
58
Multi-Way Switchgear Controller ETR606
6) DC1-1 Delay
Range
0.01 ~ 600.00 sec
Default
2.00
Step
0.01 sec
n Set a delay time of DC1-1.
7) DC1-2 Type
Range
UNDER, OVER
Default
UNDER
Step
-
n Set the alarm type (under or over) for DC1-2.
8) TD1-2 Pickup
Range
0(OFF), 0 ~ 6000.0
Default
OFF
Step
0.1
n Set DC1-2 pickup value.
n Dropout value of DC1 is ±10% of pickup value.
9) DC1-2 Delay
Range
0.01 ~ 600.00 sec
Default
2.00
Step
0.01 sec
n Set a delay time of DC1-2 for pickup delay time and dropout delay
time.
n When DC1-2 alarm occurs, "DC12T" event occurs.
10) DC2~4's setting factor is identical to DC1's.
59
Multi-Way Switchgear Controller ETR606
7.1.1.4. ALTS Control
The Multi-Way Switchgear Controller ETR606 provides an Automatic Load
Transfer Switching (ALTS) function for two-way power source circuits. The
purpose of the ALTS funtion is to ensure a continuous power supply by
automatically transferring the load from the main power source to the standby
power source in the event of a power outage or a voltage drop below the
reference level while securing the dual power supply.
(1) Features and Main Function
Power Circuit and Main Power Selection Function
Ÿ
In the Multi-Way Switchgear Controller ETR606, two switchgear's ways are
selected as the power sources circuits for ALTS function operation. Power
source 1 is fixed to 1-Way, and power source 2 can be selected from 2-Way
to 6-Way (or 4-Way).
Ÿ
One of the two selected power source circuits can be assigned as the main
power source and the other as the standby power source to allow not only
load transfer operation but also re-transfer operation back to the main power
source.
Ÿ
In the case of a non-selection option for main power source, the re-transfer
operation to the main power source can not be performed.
Ÿ
The main power options are Power1, Power2, and None (non-selection).
Voltage Monitoring Function
Ÿ
The voltage of the main power source and standby power source will be
monitored all the time. When main power loss (main power outage) occurs,
the load will be transferred (switched) to the standby power source after
passing the switching time delay.
Ÿ
According to the user's setting, after the main power has been restored, the
load can be re-transferred to the main power source.
ALTS Operation Prevention Function at Temporary Power Outage
Ÿ
Transfer time delay setting is provided and can be set to prevent any
unnecessary automatic load transfer operation due to a temporary power
outage event.
60
Multi-Way Switchgear Controller ETR606
Open Phase Monitoring Function
Ÿ
When a single or two phases of the power source voltage drop below the
open phase setting value, an open phase case will be detected. Depending on
the user's setting, the load power can be remained in the present power
source connection or can be transferred to the standby power source.
Ÿ
The open phase is monitored according to the open phase element setting of
the corresponding switchgear’s way.
ALTS Operation Blocking and Line System Separation When Fault Current Occurs
Ÿ
When the load current exceeds the current fault pickup, the automatic load
transfer operation will be blocked. For a permanent fault case (CB Type: fault
trip and lockout, SW Type: passed the permanent FI time), the operation block
will be maintained until a manual reset command is performed.
Ÿ
According to the user's setting, in the permanent fault case, all the power
source circuits can be opened to isolate the system.
Automatic Release Function Of ALTS Operation Blocking in case of Temporary Fault
Ÿ
When the load current exceeds the current fault pickup value, the automatic
transfer operation will be blocked. For a temporary fault case (CB type: fault
clears during the reset time of cycle sequence, SW type: fault clears before
passing
the
permanent
FI
time),
the
operation
block
status
will
be
automatically released.
Auto Mode and Manual Mode Selection of ALTS Function
Ÿ
According to the user, the operation mode of ALTS control function can be
selected between two options AUTO mode and MANUAL mode.
Ÿ
In AUTO mode, Automatic transfer operation mode, the open or close
operation
of
power
source
circuits
and
the
load
power
transferred
is
performed automatically. Hence, the power source circuit operation cannot be
operated manually by the user's command.
Ÿ
In MANUAL mode, the open or close operation of the power source circuits is
manually performed by the user through the front panel OPEN/CLOSE button
or remote control commands. Even if the ALTS function setting is ENABLE,
the automatic load transfer switching operation will not active.
Ÿ
The ALTS mode function can be changed through the ALTS mode setting
menu, PLC logic command, or remotely through Digital Output (DO) point.
61
Multi-Way Switchgear Controller ETR606
Interlock Function
Ÿ
The
interlock
function
is
programmed
to
prevent
a
simultaneous
close
operation of the two power source circuits. If the two power sources circuits
are closed, the automatic load transfer operation is blocked.
Phase Difference Monitoring Function
Ÿ
If a phase voltage difference is detected in the power source circuit that has
been closed, the automatic load switching operation will be blocked to prevent
bad affection to the load or device due to transfer or re-transfer operation.
Ÿ
The phase difference is monitored according to the phase difference element
setting of the corresponding switchgear’s way.
(2) ALTS Control Settings
Place the cursor on “ALTS Control” in GENERAL menu, press [ENT] button to
move into this menu. The ALTS Control function can be set through this menu
and the detail setting is as follow.
[ALTS CONTROL]
>Function:
DISABLE
ALTS Mode:
AUTO
Main Power Select:
NONE
Power 1 Select:
1-WAY
Power 2 Select:
6-WAY
Transfer TD:
0.60
Retransfer TD:
30.00
Open at Fault:
NO
Transfer at OP:
NO
[DISABLE/ENABLE]
▲▼Move, ■Select, ●Return
[ LCD Screen ] ALTS Control Menu Screen
1) Function
Range
DISABLE, ENABLE
Default
DISABLE
Step
~
n Set whether to use ALTS (Automatic Load Transfer Switch) control
function or not.
62
Multi-Way Switchgear Controller ETR606
2) ALTS Mode
Range
AUTO, MANUAL
Default
AUTO
Step
~
n Select the ALTS operation mode.
n AUTO Mode : Automatic transfer operation mode, where the open or
close
operation
of
power
source
circuits
and
the
load
power
transferred is performed automatically according to the ALTS function.
Hence, the power source circuit operation cannot be operated manually
by the user's command.
n MANUAL Mode : Manual operation, where the open or close operation
of the power source circuits is performed manually by the user
through
the
commands.
front
In
this
panel
mode,
OPEN/CLOSE
the
button
automatic
load
or
remote
transfer
control
switching
operation is not performed even if the ALTS function is ENABLE.
3) Main Power Select
Range
NONE, POWER 1, POWER 2
Default
NONE
Step
~
n Set whether to use Main Power of ALTS control function.
n Allows the load to be re-transferred to the main power source when
the main power source is restored after the automatic load transfer
operation is performed.
n NONE : Does not select the main power.
n POWER1 : Select for power 1 circuit as main power.
n POWER2 : Select for power 2 circuit as main power.
4) Power 1 Select
Range
1-WAY
Default
1-WAY
Step
~
n Select the switchgear's way for power source 1.
n Power source 1 is fixed to 1-Way.
63
Multi-Way Switchgear Controller ETR606
5) Power 2 Select
Range
2-WAY ~ 6-WAY (or 4-WAY)
Default
6-WAY
Step
~
n Select the switchgear's way for power source 2
6) Transfer TD
Range
0.00~600.00 s
Default
0.60 s
Step
0.01 s
n Set the time delay of the automatic transfer operation.
n This is the delay time to transfer to standby power, after main power
is lost.
7) Retransfer TD
Range
0.00~600.00 s
Default
30.00 s
Step
0.01 s
n Set the time delay of Automatic Re-transfer operation.
n This is the delay time to re-transfer to the main power when the
main power is restored normally after automatic transfer to the
standby power after the power is lost.
n If the above “Main Power Select” is set to NONE, re-transfer function
does not work.
8) Open at Fault
Range
NO, YES
Default
NO
Step
~
n Set whether to isolate the system or not, in the case of a Permarment
fault.
n When it is set to YES, and a permarnent fault occurs, both Power 1
and Power 2 circuit are opened to isolate the load side from the
system.
64
Multi-Way Switchgear Controller ETR606
9) Transfer at OP
Range
NO, YES
Default
NO
Step
~
n Set whether to perform automatic load transfer to the standby power,
when detecting open phase.
n If it is set to YES, load is automatically transferred to the standby
power when not only in case of power loss, but also when an open
phase is detected.
n If it is set to NO, automatic transfer operates to a standby
power
only when power is lost. It does not perform automatic transfer when
an open phase is detected and maintains at the current power state.
65
Multi-Way Switchgear Controller ETR606
7.1.1.5. PASSCODE
Place the cursor on “PASSCODE” in GENERAL menu, press [ENT] button to
move into this menu.
When entering to “PASSCODE” menu, Passcord 3 certification is necessary.
ETR606 has 3 (three) Passcods, Passcords can be changed in this menu.
Passcode 1 is applied when changing General Global settings and Group Settings, and
Passcode 2 is applied when communication setting is changed. Passcode 3 is applied when
clearing or resetting registered data such as event logs, counter logs, energy data, etc.
The setting range and the procedure for changing the three passcods are the same.
[PASSCODE]
>1.Passcode1
2.Passcode2
3.Passcode3
▲▼Move, ■Select, ●Return
[PASSCODE1]
>Passcode1:
[0000~9999:1]
▲▼Move, ■Select, ●Return
[ LCD Screen ] Passcode Menu Screen
1) Passcode 1
Range
0000 ~ 9999
Default
0000
Step
1
n Put the passcode 1.
2) Passcode 2~3’s setting factor is identical to Passcode 1.
66
0000
Multi-Way Switchgear Controller ETR606
7.1.1.6. PLC
Place the cursor on “PLC” in GENERAL menu, press [ENT] button to move into
this menu.
[PLC]
>1.Logic Timer
2.Pulse Timer
3.IN/OUT Ports
4.Latch Logisc
▲▼Move, ■Select, ●Return
[ LCD Screen ] PLC Menu Screen
(1) LOGIC TIMER
Place the cursor on “LOGIC TIMER”, press [ENT] button to move into this
menu.
[LOGIC TIMER]
>TM01-PU:
0.05
TM01-DO:
0.05
:
:
:
TM14-PU:
1.00
TM14-DO:
0.05
TM15-PU:
1.00
TM15-DO:
0.05
TM16-PU:
2.90
TM16-DO:
0.01
[0.01~60000.00:0.01s]
▲▼Move, ■Select, ●Return
[ LCD Screen ] Logic Timer Menu Screen
Ÿ
PLC has 16 logic timer.
Ÿ
If Input A is occurred in logic timer, X time later, output B becomes 1. If
input A is disappeared, Y time later, output B becomes 0.
to “Figure 7-2. Logic Timer”.
67
Ÿ
X is Pick-up timer, Y is Dropout timer.
Ÿ
In PLC, A shall be input at the user logic ITM□.
Ÿ
In PLC, B is output for TM□.
Please refer
Multi-Way Switchgear Controller ETR606
A
TM□
X
B
Y
0s/0s
*. X: Pickup Time, Y: Droupout Time
[ Logic Timer Symbol ]
[ Logic Timer Example ]
<Figure 7-2> Logic Timer
1) TM1-PU
Range
0.01 ~ 60000.00 sec
Default
0.05
Step
0.01 sec
n Set pickup time of Logic Timer 1.
2) TM1-DO
Range
0.01 ~ 60000.00 sec
Default
0.05
Step
0.01 sec
n Set dropout time of Logic Timer 1.
3) Logic Timer 2~16(TM2~16)'s setting factor is identical to Logic Timer 1(TM1).
(2) PULSE TIMER
Place the cursor on “PULSE TIMER”, press [ENT] button to move into this
menu.
[PULSE TIMER]
>PTM1 :
1.00
PTM2 :
1.00
PTM3 :
1.00
PTM4 :
1.00
PTM5 :
1.00
PTM6 :
1.00
PTM7 :
1.00
PTM8 :
1.00
[0.01~60000.00:0.01s]
▲▼Move, ■Select, ●Return
[ LCD Screen ] Pulse Timer Menu Screen
68
Multi-Way Switchgear Controller ETR606
Ÿ
PLC has 8 pulse timer.
Ÿ
When Input A becomes 1 in pulse timer, output B becomes 1, this output
comes for Y time. Please refer to “<Figure 7-3> Pulse Timer”.
Ÿ
In PLC, A shall be input at user logic IPTM□.
Ÿ
In PLC, B is output for PTM□.
PTM□
A
B
Y
0s
*. Y: Pulse Time
[ Pulse Timer Symbol ]
[ Pulse Timer Example ]
<Figure 7-3> Pulse Timer
1) PTM1
Range
0.01 ~ 60000.00 sec
Default
1.00
Step
0.01 sec
n Set output time of Pulse Timer 1.
2) Pulse Timer 2~16(PTM2~16)'s setting factor is identical to pulse timer 1(PTM1).
(3) IN/OUT PORTS
Place the cursor on “IN/OUT Ports” in PLC menu, press [ENT] button to move
into this menu.
[IN/OUT PORTS]
>1.Input Debounce
2.Output Pulse Time
▲▼Move, ■Select, ●Return
[ LCD Screen ] Pulse Timer Menu Screen
69
Multi-Way Switchgear Controller ETR606
A. INPUT DEBOUNCE
It moves to this menu if [ENT] key is pressed after locating cursor in "1.
INPUT DEBOUNCE" menu.
[INPUT DEBOUNCE]
>IN101:
0.020
IN102:
0.020
IN103:
0.020
:
:
:
:
:
:
IN221:
0.020
IN222:
0.020
IN223:
0.020
IN224:
0.020
[0.005~10.000:0.001s]
▲▼Move, ■Select, ●Return
[ LCD Screen ] Input Debounce Setting Menu Screen
Ÿ
Input debounce timer is individually prepared in Control Input.
Ÿ
Input debounce timer sets a time to remove Chattering of INPUT signal.
Ÿ
In Input debounce timer, if Input A becomes 1, X time later, Output B
becomes 1. If Input A is disappeared, X time later, Output B becomes 0.
Please refer to "<Figure 7-4> Input Debounce Timer".
Ÿ
In PLC, A is IN101~IN□ of Control Input, B is output for IN□.
A
IN□
X
X
B
0s
*. X: Debounce Time
[ Input Debounce Timer Symbol ]
[ Input Debounce Timer Exmaple ]
<Figure 7-4> Input Debounce Timer
70
Multi-Way Switchgear Controller ETR606
1) IN101
Range
0.005 ~ 10.000 sec
Default
0.020
Step
0.001 sec
n Set Input Debounce Time of IN101.
2) IN102~108 and IN201~224's set factor are identical to IN101's.
B. OUTPUT PULSE TIME
It moves to this menu if [ENT] key is pressed after locating cursor in "2.
OUTPUT PULSE TIME" menu.
[OUTPUT PULSE TIME]
>OUT101:
OUT102:
OUT103:
:
OUT108:
OUT201:
OUT202:
OUT203:
:
OUT212:
3.00
3.00
3.00
:
0.05
3.00
3.00
3.00
:
0.05
0(BUFF), 0.01~100.00:0.01 s
▲▼Move, ■Select, ●Return
[ LCD Screen ] Output Pulse Time Setting Menu Screen
Ÿ
Output Pulse Timer has Control Output individually.
Ÿ
In output pulse timer, Input B is 0 and, depending on Input A, Output C
becomes 1. When Input A becomes 1, Output C becomes 1 for
Y time.
However, if Y time is set for 0, depending on Input A, corresponding
coincidently and if A is 1, C becomes 1, and if A becomes 0 then, C
becomes 0 as buffer. Please refer to "<Figure 7-5> Output Pulse Timer“.
71
Ÿ
In PLC, A shall be input at user logic IOUT□.
Ÿ
In PLC, B shall be input at user logic BOUT□.
Ÿ
In PLC, C is output for OUT□ and this output operates RELAY.
Multi-Way Switchgear Controller ETR606
OUT□
A
B
Y
R
C
0s
*. Y: Output Pulse Time
[ Output Pulse Timer Symbol ]
[ Output Pulse Timer Example ]
<Figure 7-5> Output Pulse Timer
1) OUT101
Range
0(BUFF), 0.01 ~ 100.00 sec
Default
3.00
Step
0.01 sec
n Set Output pulse Time of OUT101.
2) OUT102~212's settings are identical to OUT101's.
Only, OUT105, 106, 108, 205~212 default value is 0.50sec.
72
Multi-Way Switchgear Controller ETR606
(4) LATCH LOGIC
Place the cursor on “Latch Logic” in PLC menu, press [ENT] button to move
into this menu.
[LATCH LOGIC]
>NV Function:
OFF
[ OFF/ON ]
▲▼Move, ■Select, ●Return
[ LCD Screen ] Latch Logic Menu Screen
Ÿ
PLC has 8 latch logics.
Ÿ
When input B is 0 and input A is 1 then output C is 1 and even when
input A becomes 0, output C does not become 0. When input B is 1 then
output C becomes 0.
Ÿ
A is input into user logic “LSET□”.
Ÿ
B is input into user logic “LRST□”.
Ÿ
C is output as “LT□”.
A
B
LT□
S
Q
R
[ Latch Logic Symbol ]
C
[ Latch Logic Example ]
<Figure 7-6> Latch Logic Symbol
73
Multi-Way Switchgear Controller ETR606
1) NV Function
Range
OFF, ON
Default
OFF
Step
-
n Sets the non-volatility of the latch logic.
n If set to ON, latch logic will remain set(‘1’) status by restarting
ETR606.
n But, when set to OFF, the set(‘1’) status of the latch logic is
cleared(‘0’) when ETR606 restarts.
(5) ONESHOT LOGIC
Ÿ
PLC has 8 oneshot logics.
Ÿ
Each time input A is 1, output B outputs 1 Pulse. Even when input A is 1
continuously, output B does not output.
Ÿ
A is input into user logic “IOS□”.
Ÿ
B is output as “OS□”.
OS□
B
A
[ Oneshot Logic Symbol ]
[ Oneshot Logic Example ]
<Figure 7-7> Oneshot Logic Symbol
74
Multi-Way Switchgear Controller ETR606
(6) PLC Setting Example
The user can use the inner timer and counter used for PLC setting and the
EVENTs that occur within to logically map out for easier control of input/output.
For operators used in logical mapping, refer to “[Table 7-2] Operator Symbols”.
[Table 7-2] Operator Symbols
OPERATOR
DESCRIPTION
*
“AND” - when all the inputs are 1, the output is 1.
+
“OR” – when one of the inputs is 1, the output is 1.
!
“NOT” – when the input is 1, the output is 0.
(
)
1
0
-
This operation is performed first.
-
When outputting directly, the output is 1.
-
When outputting directly, the output is 0.
-
Buffer output.
PLC logic setting example is as follows;
When a Phase Time OverCurrent fault occurs in 1 way, the output signal of
OUT108 port is set to (‘1’), and the PLC logic setting is implemented so that the
set output of OUT108 port is maintained until the FI Reset command. Check
below:
Example: Logical Expression
1)
LSET01 = 51P11T ----------------------------- Latch Logic 01(LT01) Set Condition
LRST01 = CFIRST ----------------------------- Latch Logic 01(LT01) Reset Condition
Using PLC's Latch Logic 01 (LT01), when phase time overcurrent (51P11T)
of circuit 1 occurs, the logic is set to ('1') and maintained until the FI Reset
Command (CFIRST) is inputted.
75
Multi-Way Switchgear Controller ETR606
2)
IOUT108 = LT01
----------------------------- OUT108 Port Operation Logic
BOUT108 = 0
----------------------------- OUT108 Port Block Logic
By mapping the above Latch Logic 01 to the operation logic of OUT108 Port,
when the latch logic 01 is set to '1′, OUT108 port is implemented to be the
output. As there is no block condition for Output108 port, 0 remains the
constant input.
3)
OUT108 Pulse Time : BUFF (0)
In order for the OUT108 Port output
time to be the same as the IOUT108
logic state, Pulse Time is set to
Buffer (BUFF). If the Latch Logic
01, which is mapped to IOUT108
logic, is set to (‘1’), OUT108 Port output is set. And, if the Latch Logic 01
is cleared (‘0’), OUT Port output will also be cleared.
Latch Logic
51P11T
CFIRST
LSET01
LRST01
S
Q
R
LT01
Output Pulse Timer
IOUT108
BOUT108
OUT108
R
Y
BUFF
0
<Figure 7-8> OUT108 Output Signal Logic Diagram
76
Multi-Way Switchgear Controller ETR606
PLC Editting Example
As shown in “<Figure 7-9> PLC Edit Screen”, input the logical expression in the
PLC edit screen operating program then upload PLC data to ETR606. For more
info, consult “ETR606 ETIMS Interface Software User Manual”.
<Figure 7-9> PLC Edit Screen
NOTE : 1. When editing PLC logic, there must not be any blank space.
2. When editing PLC logic, you can see the list of logic that can be
input to the equation by pressing the ‘F1’ key.
77
Multi-Way Switchgear Controller ETR606
7.1.1.7. DEVICE
Place the cursor on “DEVICE” in GENERAL menu, press [ENT] button to move
into this menu.
[DEVICE]
>1.Control Type
2.Active Set Group
3.Operation Time
4.H/W Option
5.Lcd Display
6.Panel Sleep
7.Time Zone
8.Rms Compensation
9.Others
10.Factory Debug
▲▼Move, ■Select, ●Return
[ LCD Screen ] Device Menu Screen
(1) CONTROL TYPE
It moves to this menu if [ENT] key is pressed after locating cursor in "1.
CONTROL TYPE" in ‘DEVICE’ menu. Set control type per way of switchgear of
ETR606 in this menu. At the time of product shipment, this menu is set to user's
request and is best to not make any alteration. It might be damage the main unit
if the setting here doesn't match the specification of the switchgear.
[CONTROL TYPE]
>1 WAY:
2 WAY:
3 WAY:
4 WAY:
5 WAY:
6 WAY:
SWTYPE
CBTYPE
CBTYPE
CBTYPE
CBTYPE
SWTYPE
[ NONE/SWTYPE/CBTYPE ]
▲▼Move, ■Select, ●Return
[ LCD Screen ] Control Type Setting Menu Screen
1) 1 WAY ~ 6 WAY
Range
NONE, CBTYPE, SWTYPE
Default
CBTYPE
Step
-
n NONE : Selected when way of switchgear is not used.
n CBTYPE : Circuit breaker uses for selected way of switchgear.
n SWTYPE : Switch uses for selected way of switchgear.
78
Multi-Way Switchgear Controller ETR606
(2) ACTIVE SET GROUP
Move to this menu by pressing [ENT] key after locating the cursor in "2.
ACTIVE SET GROUP" in ‘DEVICE’ menu. ETR606 has the same two setting
groups for each circuit. From this menu active setting group can be chosen.
[ACTIVE SET GROUP]
>1 WAY:
PRIMARY
2 WAY:
PRIMARY
3 WAY:
PRIMARY
4 WAY:
PRIMARY
5 WAY:
PRIMARY
6 WAY:
PRIMARY
[ PRIMARY/ALTERNATE ]
▲▼Move, ■Select, ●Return
[ LCD Screen ] Active Set Group Setting Menu Screen
1) 1 WAY ~ 6 WAY
Range
PRIMARY, ALTERNATE
Default
PRIMARY
Step
-
n PRIMARY: Select the primary setting group for selected way of
switchgear.
n ALTERNATE: Select the alternative setting group for selected way of
switchgear.
(3) OPERATION TIME
Move to this menu by pressing [ENT] key after locating the cursor in "3.
OPERATION TIME" in ‘DEVICE’ menu.
[OPERATION TIME]
>Open Time:
Close Time:
OP Fail Time:
CL Fail Time:
0.004
0.050
1.00
10.00
[ 0.000~1.000:0.001 s ]
▲▼Move, ■Select, ●Return
[ LCD Screen ] Operation Time Setting Menu Screen
79
Multi-Way Switchgear Controller ETR606
1) OPEN TIME
Range
0.000 ~ 1.000 sec
Default
0.004
Step
0.001
n Set actual opening time of switchgear’s circuit breaker. It compensates
fault trip time (T-C curve and instantaneous) following this setting.
n Circuit breaker’s complete opening time is calculated as follows.
n Total CB Clearing Time = Relay Release Time
+ CB Trip Time
(CB Opening Time + Arcing Time)
*. EXEMPLE) In case that TCC value applied to ETR606 is 1.00sec and
CB Trip Time is 30msec + 10msec, actual circuit breaker’s Clearing
Time is 1.00 + 30msec + 10msec = 1.04sec. The difference between
TCC value and actual Clearing Time, 40msec needs to be set for CB
Trip Time(40msec). This setting time compensates CB Trip Time.
2) CLOSE TIME
Range
0.000 ~ 10.000 sec
Default
0.050
Step
0.001
n Set actual closing time of switchgear’s circuit breaker. It compensates
reclosing time following this setting.
3) OP Fail Time
Range
0.05 ~ 100.00 sec
Default
1.00
Step
0.01
n Set fail time for decision Circuit Breaker’s opening operation fail. After
the trip signal is released, if the circuit breaker does not open during
this setting time, it is determined as opening operation fail.
4) CL Fail Time
80
Range
0.05 ~ 100.00 sec
Default
1.00
Step
0.01
Multi-Way Switchgear Controller ETR606
n Set fail time for decision Circuit Breaker’s closing operation fail. After
the close signal is released, if the circuit breaker does not close
during this setting time, it is determined as closing operation fail.
※. NOTE ) The opening operation fail time and the closing operation fail
time of the switchgear’s each switch circuit(S/W type) are
internally fixed to 5 sec.
(4) H/W INPUT
Move to this menu by pressing [ENT] key after locating the cursor in "4. H/W
INPUT" in ‘DEVICE’ menu. Set the H/W option of ETR606 from this menu. The
items may behave incorrectly if the setting is activated for non installed
hardware.
[H/W OPTION]
>DC Input Use:
IRIG Use:
Wifi Use:
ON
OFF
OFF
[ OFF/ON ]
▲▼Move, ■Select, ●Return
[ LCD Screen ] H/W Option Setting Menu Screen
1) DC INPUT USE
Range
OFF, ON
Default
ON
Step
-
n Select whether the DC input board is installed.
n When set to OFF, the following applies;
- DC chanel is measured always as 0.
- Monitor function doesn’t work about DC input port.
81
Multi-Way Switchgear Controller ETR606
2) IRIG USE
Range
OFF, ON
Default
OFF
Step
-
n Select whether the time synchronization module(GPS or IRIG) is
installed.
n In order to receive location information from time synchronization device
(IRIG or GPS), RS485-1 port communication connection is required.
n The
communication
speed
of
RS485-1
port
should
be
fixed
at
38400bps.
3) Wifi USE
Range
OFF, ON
Default
OFF
Step
-
n Select whether the wifi is installed.
n Wifi is used to wirelessly connect the ETR606 to the ETIMS Interface
Software.
(5) LCD DISPLAY
Place the cursor on “LCD Display” in ‘DEVICE’ menu, press [ENT] button to
move into this menu. In this menu, items related to the LCD screen display
method of the front panel are set.
[LCD DISPLAY]
>lCD BG Color:
Date Display Type:
WHITE
MDY
[WHITE/SKY/GREEN/BLACK]
▲▼Move, ■Select, ●Return
[ LCD Screen ] LCD Display Setting Menu Screen
1) LCD BG COLOR
Range
WHITE, SKY, GREEN, BLACK
Default
WHITE
Step
82
-
Multi-Way Switchgear Controller ETR606
n Set LCD screen background color.
n However, the background color of the diagram initial screen is always
set to black regardless of this setting.
2) DATE DISPLAY TYPE
Range
YMD, MDY
Default
MDY
Step
-
n Set the display type of the date displayed on the LCD screen such as
the event menu.
n YMD : Displays in turn Year / Month / Date
n MDY : Displays in turn Month / Date / Year
(6) PANEL SLEEP
Place the cursor on “PANEL SLEEP” in ‘DEVICE. menu, press [ENT] button to
move into this menu. Menu to set the interval time that User interface panel
turns into sleep mode.
[PANEL SLEEP]
>Sleep Time:
Door Sleep Act:
Awake Method:
5
YES
BOTH
[0(OFF),1~100:1m]
▲▼Move, ■Select, ●Return
[ LCD Screen ] Panel Sleep Setting Menu Screen
1) SLEEP TIME
Range
0(OFF), 1 ~ 100 min
Default
5min
Step
1min
n Set a time for sleep mode delay. Within this set time, if there is no
key operation on interface panel, ETR606 goes into sleep mode.
2) DOOR SLEEP ACT'
83
Range
YES/NO
Default
YES
Step
-
Multi-Way Switchgear Controller ETR606
n Select whether to enter sleep mode by control door status.
n If you set this setting to yes and the door is control closed for 3
minutes, ETR606 goes into sleep mode.
3) AWAKE METHOD
Range
KEY/DOOR/BOTH
Default
BOTH
Step
-
n Choose the display wake up method.
n DOOR : Using door pin attached on the control door, when the door is
open, the control panel wakes up from the sleep mode.
n KEY : When Control keys(FUN, ENT, UP, DOWN, SEL and COM keys)
on the front panel is pushed, the control panel wakes up from the
sleep mode.
n BOTH : Above both options are all used.
(7) TIME ZONE
Place the cursor on “TIME ZONE” in DEVICE menu, press [ENT] button to move
in this menu.
ETR606 manages RCT (real clock time) as local time. This setting is used to
calculate the local time when the type of synchronizing reference time received
from the Time Synchronization function is GMT (Greenwich Mean Time). Select
standard time zone for user country and region.
Time Synchronization Source and Time Type of Time Synchronization function
can be set in “Time Syn 'Src” and “Time Syn' Ref” item of “GLOBAL SETTINGS
/ COMMUNICATION / EVENT & ETC” menu.
[TIME ZONE]
>GMT Offset-Sign:
GMT Offset-Hour:
GMT Offset-Min:
+
9
0
[ +/- ]
▲▼Move, ■Select, ●Return
[ LCD Screen ] Time Zone Setting Menu Screen
84
Multi-Way Switchgear Controller ETR606
1) GMT OFFSET-SIGN
Range
+, -
Default
+
Step
-
n Display the receive UTC time(Coordinated Universal Time) and the
local time off-set direction.
n Local time is faster than UTC time, select “+”, otherwise, select “-“.
2) GMT OFFSET-HOUR
Range
0~23 hour(s)
Default
9
Step
1 hour
n Set the difference of “Hour” between UTC time and Local time.
3) GMT OFFSET-MIN
Range
0~59 min
Default
0
Step
1 min
n Set the difference of “Minute” between UTC and Local time.
NOTE : Korea Local time is 9 hour faster than UTC time, set it as follows
(+9:00) ➜ Sign : +, Hour : 9, Min : 0
The default value of above settings can vary according to the
option type.
(8) RMS COMPENSATION
Place the cursor on “RMS COMPENSATION” in DEVICE menu, press [ENT]
button to move in this menu.
[RMS COMPENSATION]
>Compensation:
ON
[ OFF/ON ]
▲▼Move, ■Select, ●Return
[ LCD Screen ] RMS Compensation Setting Menu Screen
85
Multi-Way Switchgear Controller ETR606
1) COMPENSATION
Range
OFF, ON
Default
ON
Step
-
n When calculating RMS (Root Meas Square) values of current and
voltage, sets if it compensates the calculation according to the
frequency variation.
(9) OTHERS
Place the cursor on “OTHERS” in DEVICE menu, press [ENT] button to move in
this menu.
[OTHERS]
>16bit Count Use:
16bit Ener’ Use:
OFF
OFF
[ OFF/ON ]
▲▼Move, ■Select, ●Return
[ LCD Screen ] Others Setting Menu Screen
1) 16BIT COUNT USE
Range
OFF, ON
Default
ON
Step
-
n Set the count data format that ETR606 registed.
n OFF :
Use 32bit format Count Data. Each count data is rolled over to
0 if the counter value exceeds 1,000,000.
n ON :
Use 16bit format Count Data. Each count data is rolled over to
0 if the counter value exceeds 65,534.
2) 16BIT ENER' USE
Range
OFF, ON
Default
ON
Step
-
n Set the energy data format that the ETR606 registed.
n OFF :
Use 32bit format Energy Data. Each energy data is rolled over
to 0 if the counter value exceeds 999,999,999.
86
Multi-Way Switchgear Controller ETR606
n ON :
Use 16bit format Energy Data. Each energy data is rolled over
to 0 if the counter value exceeds 60,000.
(10) FACTORY DEBUG
This menu is for Manufacturer’s maintenance purpose.
7.1.1.8. SAVE SETTINGS
From this menu, you can save the changed setting values of the GENERAL menu.
The procedure for storing the set value is described in “6.7. Setting Save”.
87
Multi-Way Switchgear Controller ETR606
7.1.2. Communication Settings
Place the cursor on “COMMUNIATION” in GLOBAL SETTINGS menu, press
[ENT] button to move into this menu. Communication and its related elements
are set in this menu and it has sub-menu as below.
[COMMUNICATION]
>1.PROTOCOLS
2.PORTS
3.DIALUP MODEM
4.FTP-SSL
5.WIFI
6.EVENT&ETC
*.Save Settings
▲▼Move, ■Select, ●Return
[ LCD Screen ] Communication Setting Menu Screen
Caution : Changed set valued must be saved to be applied. When escaping
from "*. SAVE SETTINGS" menu or moving to high menu, changed
set value is saved by 'Changed set value saved message'.
7.1.2.1. PROTOCOLS
Place the cursor on “PROTOCOLS” in COMMUNICATION menu, press [ENT]
button to move into this menu. Communication protocol of ETR606 is set and it
has sub-menus as below.
[PROTOCOLS]
>1.DNP3
2.IEC60870-5
3.MODBUS
4.IEC61850
5.SNTP
6.SNMP
7.ETIMS
▲▼Move, ■Select, ●Return
[ LCD Screen ] Protocols Setting Menu Screen
88
Multi-Way Switchgear Controller ETR606
(1) DNP3 PROTOCOL
Move
to
“MAIN
MENU(COM)
/
GLOBAL
SETTING/
COMMUNICATION/
PROTOCOLS/ DNP3” to select setting for DNP3 Protocols.
[DNP3]
>1.DNP3 slave 1
2.DNP3 slave 2
3.Common
▲▼Move, ■Select, ●Return
[ LCD Screen ] DNP3 Setting Menu Screen
A. DNP3 Slave1 and DNP3 Slave 2
Setting items of “DNP3 SLAVE 1” and “DNP3 SLAVE 2” menu are same as
following;
[DNP3 SLAVE 1]
>Function:
DISABLE
Port Select:
RS232-1
D/L Confirm:
SOME
D/L FrameDly:
100
D/L Retries:
0
D/L Timeout:
10
A/L Retries:
0
A/L Timeout:
30
Master Addr:
60000
Slave Address:
1
SBO Timeout:
15
Init Unsol:
ENABLE
Unsol Time:
5
Unsol Type:
NOTRIG
Class1:
ENABLE
Class2:
ENABLE
Class3:
ENABLE
TCP/UDP Select:
TCP
TCP Port:
20000
UDP Port :
20001
Master IP Oct1:
0
Master IP Oct2:
0
Master IP Oct3:
0
Master IP Oct4:
0
K-Alv Check Tm:
4
Fragment Size:
2048
Time Req(m):
OFF
Retry Type:
REGEN
SA Func:
DISABLE
TCP/IP TLS:
DISABLE
Unsol off TO:
OFF
[ DISABLE/ENABLE ]
▲▼Move, ■Select, ●Return
[ LCD Screen ] DNP3 Slave 1 and Slave2 Setting Menu Screen
89
Multi-Way Switchgear Controller ETR606
1) FUNCTION
Range
DISABLE, ENABLE
Default
DISABLE
Step
-
n To select DNP3 Slave1 or Slave2, set ENABLE.
2) PORT SELECT
Range
RS232-1, RS232-2, RS485-1, RS485-2,
Default
ETHERNET1, ETHERNET2
RS232-1
Step
-
n Select DNP3 communication port.
3) D/L CONFIRM
Range
NO, YES, SOME
Default
SOME
Step
-
n Choose whether Data Link Confirm is used or not.
- NO : Data Link Confirm is not used.
- YES : Data Link Confirm is used.
- SOME : Data Link Confirm is used in case of Multi-frame.
n When Data Link Confirm is used, it shall be set same as the Host
setting. If the setting is different from Host setting, the communication
may be failed due to Data Link Reset.
4) D/L FRAMEDLY
Range
0~5000 msec
Default
100
Step
10 msec
n Set Data Link frame Delay Time.
n In case that D/L Confirm setting is OFF, it means Frame Interval time
when multi-frame occurs.
90
Multi-Way Switchgear Controller ETR606
5) D/L RETRIES
Range
0~2
Default
0
Step
1
n Enter the number of retries that will be issued for a given data link
layer.
6) D/L TIMEOUT
Range
1 ~ 255 sec
Default
10
Step
1 sec
n Set waiting time between Data Link Frame transfer till to receive
Data Link Confirm(ACK) of Master. If there is no Data Link Confirm
receiving and Data Link retry is available, ETR606 will send Data Link
Frame again.
7) A/L RETRIES
Range
0~255
Default
0
Step
1
n Enter the number of retries of retransmission of unsol message.
8) A/L TIMEOUT
Range
1 ~ 255 sec
Default
30
Step
1 sec
n Set waiting time for Slave Application to receive A/L Confirm(ACK)
from Master Application, in case that Confirm is requested during Data
transfer from Slave Application to Master Application.
9) MASTER ADDRESS
Range
0 ~ 65534
Default
60000
Step
1
n Set master station address. This Address is an address that ETR606
refers to when transmitting unsolicited message.
91
Multi-Way Switchgear Controller ETR606
10) SLAVE ADDRESS
Range
0 ~ 65534
Default
1
Step
1
n Set slave(ETR606) address.
11) SBO TIMEOUT
Range
1 ~ 255 sec
Default
15
Step
1 sec
n Set time interval between Select Function and Operate Function. If no
operation command during set time, Select command is cancelled.
12) INIT UNSOL
Range
DISABLE, ENABLE
Default
ENABLE
Step
-
n Select a use of re-start Initial Unsolicited Response.
n ENABLE : On Power Up, Initial Unsolicited Response Message is
transferred.
n DISABLE : On Power Up, Initial Unsolicited Response Message is not
transferred.
13) UNSOL TIME
Range
0 ~ 60 sec
Default
5
Step
1 sec
n Set delay time of reporting, in case Unsolicited mode event is
occurred. Reporting is conducted if no new Event is occurred within
time.
14) UNSOL TYPE
Range
NOTRIG/PERIOD
Default
NOTRIG
Step
-
n Set the method to Unsolicited Message.
92
Multi-Way Switchgear Controller ETR606
n NOTRIG : If there is no more event occurrence during setting
unsolicited time after last event occurs, event data is transmitted.
n PERIOD : Unsolicited message is sent to a master with whole event
data occurring after setting unsolicited time starting and elapsing when
first event occurs.
15) CLASS 1
Range
DISABLE, ENABLE
Default
ENABLE
Step
-
n Select whether to send Unsolicited Response or not to master in case
that Event is occurred in Class1.
16) Class 2, Class 3 are also identical to Class1.
17) TCP/UDP SELECT
Range
TCP/UDP
Default
TCP
Step
-
n Select TCP or UDP communication at use of Ethernet port.
18) TCP PORT
Range
0 ~ 65535
Default
20000
Step
1
n Set TCP Port number of ETR606 for TCP communication.
19) UDP PORT
Range
0 ~ 65535
Default
20001
Step
1
n Set UCP Port number of ETR606 for UDP communication.
93
Multi-Way Switchgear Controller ETR606
20) Master IP Oct1 ~ 4
Range
0 ~ 255
Default
IP Oct1 : 0
IP Oct2 : 0
IP Oct3 : 0
IP Oct4 : 0
Step
1
n Select IP Address for DNP3 Communication.
n IP Address: 192.xxx.xxx.xxx
① ② ③ ④
n Master IP Oct1,2,3,4 stands for ①,②,③,④.
n For example, in case main device IP address is ‘192.168.7.202’, it
shall be set as below.
-
Master IP Oct1 : 192
-
Master IP Oct2 : 168
-
Master IP Oct3 : 7
-
Master IP Oct4 : 202
21) K-Alv CHECK TM
Range
0(OFF), 1 ~ 600 sec
Default
4
Step
1 sec
n Set time period that check communication connecting status during idle
status.
22) FRAGMENT SIZE
Range
64 ~ 2048
Default
2048
Step
1
n Set size of DNP fragment.
23) TIME REQ(m)
Range
0(OFF), 1 ~ 30000 min
Default
OFF
Step
1
n Set Time Sync in order to synchronize internal system clock with time
received from master station.
94
Multi-Way Switchgear Controller ETR606
24) RETRY TYPE
Range
REGEN, IDENT
Default
REGEN
Step
1
n Set the Retry Type(Indentical, Regenerated).
25) SA FUNC
Range
DISABLE, SAv2, SAv5
Default
DISABLE
Step
-
n Set whether DNP Secure Authenitication is used i.e, SAv2, SAv5 or
not.
- SAv2 : Version included in Clause 7 of IEEE 1815-2010.
- SAv5 : Version included in Clause 7 of IEEE 1815-2012.
26) TCP/IP TLS
Range
DISABLE, ENABLE
Default
DISABLE
Step
-
n Set the DNP TCP/IP Transport Layer Security is used or not.
27) UNSOL OFF TO
Range
0(OFF), 0~65535 sec
Default
OFF
Step
-
n Set final confirmation timeout period.
n When unsolicited message transmit is failed, the transmittion retries
repeat. After final retry is done, it waits during this set time and then
another unsolicited response series will be started.
95
Multi-Way Switchgear Controller ETR606
B. DNP3 Protocol Common
Move to “MAIN MENU/ GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS/
DNP3/ COMMON” menu. This setting is applied equally to the DNP3 Save 1 and
DNP3 Save 2 protocols.
[COMMON]
>BI Obj1 Var :
BO Obj10 Var :
CI Obj20 Var :
FRZ Obj21 Var:
AI Obj30 Var :
AO Obj40 Var :
IIN 1.5 Use:
1
2
6
10
2
2
NO
[ NONE/1/2 ]
▲▼Move, ■Select, ●Return
[ LCD Screen ] DNP3 Protocol Common Setting Menu Screen
1) BI OBJ01 VAR
Range
NONE, 1, 2
Default
1
Step
-
n Set Variation of Binary Input Object 01
- Obj. 01, Var. 0 : Binary Input – Any Variation
- Obj. 01, Var. 1 : Binary Input – Packed format
- Obj. 01, Var. 2 : Binary Input – With flags
2) BO OBJ10 VAR
Range
NONE, 1, 2
Default
2
Step
-
n Set Variation of Binary Output Object 10
- Obj. 10, Var. 0 : Binary Output – Any Variation
- Obj. 10, Var. 2 : Binary Output – Output status with flags
3) CI OBJ20 VAR
96
Range
NONE, 1, 2, 5, 6
Default
6
Step
-
Multi-Way Switchgear Controller ETR606
n Set Variation of Counter Object 20
- Obj. 20, Var. 0 : Counter – Any Variation
- Obj. 20, Var. 1 : Counter – 32-bit with flag
- Obj. 20, Var. 2 : Counter – 16-bit with flag
- Obj. 20, Var. 5 : Counter – 32-bit without flag
- Obj. 20, Var. 6 : Counter – 16-bit without flag
4) FRZ OBJ21 VAR
Range
NONE, 1, 2, 5, 6, 9, 10
Default
10
Step
-
n Set Variation of Frozen Object 21
- Obj. 21, Var. 0 : Frozen Counter – Any Variation
- Obj. 21, Var. 1 : Frozen Counter – 32-bit with flag
- Obj. 21, Var. 2 : Frozen Counter – 16-bit with flag
- Obj. 21, Var. 5 : Frozen Counter – 32-bit with flag and time
- Obj. 21, Var. 6 : Frozen Counter – 16-bit with flag and time
- Obj. 21, Var. 9 : Frozen Counter – 32-bit without flag
- Obj. 21, Var. 10 : Frozen Counter – 16-bit without flag
5) AI OBJ30 VAR
Range
NONE, 1, 2, 3, 4
Default
2
Step
-
n Set Variation of Analog Input Object 30
- Obj. 30, Var. 0 : Analog Input – Any Variation
- Obj. 30, Var. 1 : Analog Input – 32-bit with flag
- Obj. 30, Var. 2 : Analog Input – 16-bit with flag
- Obj. 30, Var. 3 : Analog Input – 32-bit without flag
- Obj. 30, Var. 4 : Analog Input – 16-bit without flag
97
Multi-Way Switchgear Controller ETR606
6) AO OBJ40 VAR
Range
NONE, 1, 2
Default
2
Step
-
n Set Variation of Analog Output Object 40
- Obj. 40, Var. 0 : Analog Output – Any Variation
- Obj. 40, Var. 1 : Analog Output – 32-bit with flag
- Obj. 40, Var. 2 : Analog Output – 16-bit with flag
7) IIN 1.5 USE
Range
NO, YES
Default
NO
Step
-
n Set if it uses IIN 1.5 bit. When it sets as YES, in the case of Local
control status, it set(‘1’) IIN 1.5 bit.
(2) IEC60870-5 PROTOCOL
Move to "MAIN MENU/ GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS/
IEC60870-5" to select setting for IEC60870-5 Protocol.
[IEC60870-5]
>1.IEC60870-5-101
2.IEC60870-5-104
3.Common
▲▼Move, ■Select, ●Return
[ LCD Screen ] IEC60870-5 protocol Setting Menu Screen
98
Multi-Way Switchgear Controller ETR606
A. IEC60870-5-101
Move to "MAIN MENU/ GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS/
IEC60870-5/ IEC60870-5-101" to select setting for IEC60870-5-101 Protocol.
[IEC60870-5-101]
>Function:
DISABLE
Port Select:
RS232-1
Link Address
1
ASDU Address
0
Cyclic Period
60
Event Period:
15
D/L Retries:
0
Conf.Timeout:
10
Max Poll Time:
10
ASDU Addr Size:
2
Link Confirm:
ALWAYS
Link Addr Size:
1
Rx Frame Size:
261
Rx Frame TO:
15
Tx Frame Size:
261
COT Size :
1
IOA Size :
2
One Ch Response:
NO
Frame Repet＇ TO:
30
Select Timeout:
5
CMD Termination:
YES
CSE Termination:
YES
Clock Sync’ Evt:
YES
MSP Time-Tag:
CP56
MIT Time-Tag:
CP56
MME Time-Tag:
CP56
Flt Time-Tag:
CP56
[ DISABLE/ENABLE ]
▲▼Move, ■Select, ●Return
[ LCD Screen ] IEC60870-5-101 Setting Menu Screen
1) Function
Range
DISABLE, ENABLE
Default
DISABLE
Step
-
n Set use of IEC60870-5-101.
2) PORT SELECT
Range
RS232-1, 2 / RS485-1, 2
Default
RS232-1
Step
-
n Select a port to use IEC60870-5-101 communication.
99
Multi-Way Switchgear Controller ETR606
3) LINK ADDRESS
Range
1 ~ 65535
Default
1
Step
1
n Enter slave(ETR606) address for IEC60870-5-101 communication.
4) ASDU ADDRESS
Range
0 ~ 65535
Default
0
Step
1
n Select Application Service Data Unit Address.
5) CYCLIC PERIOD
Range
0(OFF), 1 ~ 60000s
Default
60s
Step
1s
n Select Cyclic Period.
n It is to set interval time between Point set for Cyclic.
6) EVENT PERIOD
Range
0 ~ 255 s
Default
15
Step
1 s
n Select delay time before events are sent.
n Single event or several events occur and then if new event is not
generated during delay time, event(s) already generated is(are) sent to
a Master
7) D/L RETRIES
Range
0 ~ 255
Default
0
Step
1
n Set Data retries number.
100
Multi-Way Switchgear Controller ETR606
8) Conf. Timeout
Range
1 ~ 255 s
Default
10
Step
1 s
n Set wait time till receive Data Confirm (ACK) of master after transfer
data.
n If there is not Confirm during this setting time and Data retries is
available, ETR606 transfers Data again.
9) Max Poll Time
Range
1~255 s
Default
10
Step
1 s
n Set Data Polling period time.
10) ASDU Addr Size
Range
1 ~ 2
Default
2
Step
1
n Enter size of cause of transmission.
11) Link Confirm
Range
NEVER, ALWAYS
Default
ALWAYS
Step
-
n Enter Link layer confirm mode.
12) Link Addr Size
Range
1 ~ 2
Default
1
Step
1
n Enter size of link address.
101
Multi-Way Switchgear Controller ETR606
13) Rx Frame Size
Range
0 ~ 261
Default
261
Step
1
n Enter maximum size of received frame.
14) Rx Frame TO
Range
0(OFF), 0~255 s
Default
15
Step
1 s
n Enter maximum amount of time to wait for a complete frame after
receiving frame sync.
15) Tx Frame Size
Range
0 ~ 261
Default
261
Step
1
n Enter Maximum size of transmitted frame.
16) COT Size
Range
1 ~ 2
Default
1
Step
1
n Enter size of cause of transmission.
17) IOA Size
Range
1 ~ 3
Default
2
Step
1
n Enter size of information object address.
102
Multi-Way Switchgear Controller ETR606
18) One Ch Response
Range
NO, YES
Default
NO
Step
-
n This allows to send one character response instead of a fixed length
NACK when no response data available.
19) Frame Repet’ TO
Range
0(OFF), 0 ~ 255 s
Default
30
Step
1 s
n Enter time out for repetition of frames(or incremental application layer
timeout).
20) Select Timeout
Range
0(OFF), 0 ~ 255 s
Default
5
Step
1 s
n Enter period after a previously received select will timeout.
21) CMD Termination
Range
NO, YES
Default
YES
Step
-
n Select whether to send Activation Termination upon completion of
commands other than set point commands.
22) CSE Termination
Range
NO, YES
Default
YES
Step
-
n Select whether to send Activation Termination upon completion of set
point commands.
103
Multi-Way Switchgear Controller ETR606
23) Clock Sync’ Evt
Range
NO/YES
Default
YES
Step
-
n Select whether to generate spontaneous clock synchronization events.
24) MSP Time-Tag
Range
CP56, CP24
Default
CP56
Step
-
n Select whether a time tag format for single-point.
n CP56 : The time tag format is CP56Time2a.
n CP24 : The time tag format is CP24Time2a.
25) MIT Time-Tag
Range
CP56/CP24
Default
CP56
Step
-
n Select whether a time tag format for integrated totals.
n CP56 : The time tag format is CP56Time2a.
n CP24 : The time tag format is CP24Time2a.
26) MME Time-Tag
Range
CP56, CP24
Default
CP56
Step
-
n Select whether a time tag format for measured value and normalized
value for general event except for fault current event.
n CP56 : The time tag format is CP56Time2a.
n CP24 : The time tag format is CP24Time2a.
104
Multi-Way Switchgear Controller ETR606
27) Flt' Time-Tag
Range
CP56, CP24
Default
CP56
Step
-
n Select whether a time tag format for integrated totals.
n CP56 : The time tag format is CP56Time2a.
n CP24 : The time tag format is CP24Time2a.
B. IEC60870-5-104
Move to "MAIN MENU/ GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS/
IEC60870-5/ IEC60870-5-104" to select setting for IEC60870-5-104 Protocol.
[IEC60870-5-104]
>Function:
DISABLE
Port Select:
ETH-1
ASDU Address
0
Cyclic Period
60
Timeout(t0):
120
Timeout(t1):
15
Timeout(t2):
10
Timeout(t3):
20
Event Period:
15
TCP Port:
2404
Rx Frame Size:
255
Tx Frame Size:
255
SBO Timeout:
5
CMD Termination:
YES
CSE Termination:
YES
Clock Sync’ Evt:
YES
MSP Time-Tag:
CP56
MIT Time-Tag:
CP56
MME Time-Tag:
CP56
Flt＇ Time-Tag:
CP56
k(Max Tx):
12
w(Max Rx):
8
[ DISABLE/ENABLE ]
▲▼Move, ■Select, ●Return
[ LCD Screen ] IEC60870-5-104 protocol Setting Menu Screen
1) Function
Range
DISABLE, ENABLE
Default
DISABLE
Step
-
n Set use of IEC60870-5-104 communication.
105
Multi-Way Switchgear Controller ETR606
2) Port Select
Range
ETHERNET1/ETHERNET2
Default
ETHERNET1
Step
-
n Select a port for IEC60870-5-104 communication.
3) ASDU Address
Range
0 ~ 65535
Default
0
Step
1
n Select Application Service Data Unit Address.
4) Cyclic Period
Range
0(OFF), 1 ~ 60000
Default
60
Step
1
n Select Cyclic Period.
n It is to set interval time between Point set for Cyclic.
5) Timeout(t0)
Range
1 ~ 255 s
Default
120
Step
1 s
n Select Timeout for connection establishment.
6) Timeout(t1)
Range
1 ~ 255 s
Default
15
Step
1 s
n Select Timeout for sent or test APDUs.
7) Timeout(t2)
106
Range
1 ~ 255 s
Default
10
Step
1 s
Multi-Way Switchgear Controller ETR606
n Select Timeout for acknowledgements in case of no data message
(t2<t1).
8) Timeout(t3)
Range
1 ~ 255 s
Default
20
Step
1 s
n Select Timeout for sending test frame in case of a long idle state.
9) Event Period
Range
0 ~ 255 s
Default
15
Step
1 s
n Select delay time before events are sent.
n Single event or several events occur and then if new event is not
generated during delay time, event(s) already generated is(are) sent to
a Master
10) TCP Port
Range
1 ~ 65535
Default
2404
Step
n Select
1
TCP/IP
Port
of
ETR606
for
communication.
11) RX Frame Size
Range
0 ~ 255
Default
255
Step
1
n Enter maximum size of received frame.
12) TX Frame Size
107
Range
0 ~ 255
Default
255
Step
1
IEC60870-5-104
Protocol
Multi-Way Switchgear Controller ETR606
n Enter maximum size of transmitted frame.
13) SBO Timeout
Range
0(OFF), 0 ~ 255 s
Default
5
Step
1 s
n Enter period after a previously received select will timeout.
14) CMD Termination
Range
NO, YES
Default
YES
Step
-
n Select whether to send Activation Termination upon completion of
commands other than set point commands.
15) CSE Termination
Range
NO, YES
Default
YES
Step
-
n Select whether to send Activation Termination upon completion of set
point commands.
16) Clock Sync’ Evt
Range
NO, YES
Default
YES
Step
-
n Select whether to generate spontaneous clock synchronization events.
17) MSP Time-Tag
Range
CP56, CP24
Default
CP56
Step
-
n Select whether a time tag format for single-point.
n CP56 : The time tag format is CP56Time2a.
n CP24 : The time tag format is CP24Time2a.
108
Multi-Way Switchgear Controller ETR606
18) MIT Time-Tag
Range
CP56, CP24
Default
CP56
Step
-
n Select whether a time tag format for integrated totals.
n CP56 : The time tag format is CP56Time2a.
n CP24 : The time tag format is CP24Time2a.
19) MME Time-Tag
Range
CP56, CP24
Default
CP56
Step
-
n Select whether a time tag format for measured value and normalized
value for general event except for fault current event.
n CP56 : The time tag format is CP56Time2a.
n CP24 : The time tag format is CP24Time2a.
20) Flt' Time-Tag
Range
CP56, CP24
Default
CP56
Step
-
n Select whether a time tag format for integrated totals.
n CP56 : The time tag format is CP56Time2a.
n CP24 : The time tag format is CP24Time2a.
21) k(Max Tx)
Range
1~32767
Default
12
Step
1
n Set the maximum difference receive sequence number to send state
variable.
109
Multi-Way Switchgear Controller ETR606
22) w(Max Rx)
Range
1~32767
Default
8
Step
1
n Set the test acknowledge after receiving w I format APDUs.
C. IEC60870-5-101 and IEC60870-5-104 Protocol Common
Move to “MAIN MENU/ GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL/
IEC60870-5/
COMMON”
to
select
setting
for
common
requirement
of
IEC60870-5-101 and IEC60870-5-104.
[COMMON]
>Evt Dly Type:
NOTRIG
MSP Start:
1000
MDP Start:
1500
MMENA Start:
2000
MMENB Start:
2500
MMENC Start:
8000
MMEND Start:
6000
MIT Start:
3000
CSC Start:
21000
CDC Start:
32000
CSEMA Start:
26000
CSEMB Start:
27000
PMENA Start:
10000
PMENB Start:
12000
PMENC Start:
14000
MIT Mode :
MODE B
Propagation Delay:
0
[ DISABLE/ENABLE ]
▲▼Move, ■Select, ●Return
[ LCD Screen ] Common Setting Menu Screen
1) Evt Dly Type
Range
NOTRIG, PERIOD
Default
NOTRIG
Step
n Set
the
event
transmission
delay
type
for
IEC60870-5-101/104
communication.
n NOTRIG : If there is no event occurrence during Event Period setting
time of IEC60870-5-101 and IEC60870-5-104 after the last event
occurs, the event data is transmitted.
n PERIOD : it transfers event which is occurred per every Event Period
setting time.
110
Multi-Way Switchgear Controller ETR606
2) MSP Start
Range
0 ~ 65535
Default
1000
Step
1
n Set the start address of Single-point Information for IEC60870-5-101
/104 protocol.
3) MDP Start
Range
0 ~ 65535
Default
1500
Step
1
n Set the start address of Double-point Information for IEC60870-5-101
/104 protocol.
4) MMENA Start
Range
0 ~ 65535
Default
2000
Step
1
n Set the start address of Measured Value, Normalized Value for
IEC60870-5-101/104 protocol.
5) MMENB Start
Range
0 ~ 65535
Default
2500
Step
n Set
1
the
start
address
of
Measured
Value,
Scaled
Value
for
IEC60870-5-101/104 protocol.
6) MMENC Start
Range
0 ~ 65535
Default
8000
Step
1
n Set the start address of Measured Value, Short Floating Point Number
for IEC60870-5-101/104 protocol.
111
Multi-Way Switchgear Controller ETR606
7) MMEND Start
Range
0 ~ 65535
Default
6000
Step
1
n Set the start address of Measured value, Normalized Value without
Quality Desctiptor for IEC60870-5-101/104 protocol.
8) MIT Start
Range
0 ~ 65535
Default
3000
Step
1
n Set the start address of Integrated Totals for IEC60870-5-101/104
protocol.
9) CSC Start
Range
0 ~ 65535
Default
21000
Step
1
n Set the start address of Single Command for IEC60870-5-101/104
protocol.
10) CDC Start
Range
0 ~ 65535
Default
32000
Step
1
n Set the start address of Double Command for IEC60870-5-101/104
protocol.
11) CSEMA Start
Range
0 ~ 65535
Default
26000
Step
1
n Set the start address of Set-point Command, Normalized Value for
IEC60870-5-101/104 protocol.
112
Multi-Way Switchgear Controller ETR606
12) CSEMB Start
Range
0 ~ 65535
Default
27000
Step
n Set
the
1
start
address
of
Set-point
Command,
Scaled
Value
for
IEC60870-5-101/104 protocol.
13) PMENA Start
Range
0 ~ 65535
Default
10000
Step
1
n Set the start address of Set-point Parameter of Measured Values,
Normalized Value for IEC60870-5-101/104 protocol.
14) PMENB Start
Range
0 ~ 65535
Default
12000
Step
1
n Set the start address of Set-point Parameter of Measured Values,
Scaled Value for IEC60870-5-101/104 protocol.
15) PMENC Start
Range
0 ~ 65535
Default
14000
Step
1
n Set the start address of Parameter of Measured Values, Short Floating
Point Number for IEC60870-5-101/104 protocol.
16) MIT Mode
Range
MODE B, MODE D
Default
MODE B
Step
-
n Set the start address of Parameter of Measured Values, Short Floating
Point Number for IEC60870-5-101/104 protocol.
113
Multi-Way Switchgear Controller ETR606
17) Propagation Delay
Range
0 ~ 10000 ms
Default
0
Step
1 ms
n Set the delay time to compensate the transmission and process of
Write Clock Synchronization Request.
(3) MODBUS PROTOCOL
Move to "MAIN MENU/ GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS/
MODBUS" to select setting for MODBUS Protocol.
[MODBUS]
>Function:
Port Select:
Slave Address:
TX Delay:
TCP/UDP Select:
TCP Port:
UDP Port:
DISABLE
RS232-1
1
0.05
TCP
502
503
[ DISABLE/ENABLE ]
▲▼Move, ■Select, ●Return
[ LCD Screen ] MODBUS Protocol Setting Menu Screen
1) Function
Range
DISABLE, ENABLE
Default
DISABLE
Step
-
n Set whether to use MODBUS communication or not.
2) Port Select
Range
RS232-1, RS232-2, RS485-1, RS485-1,
Default
ETHERNET1, ETHERNET2
RS232-1
Step
-
n Select MODBUS communication port.
114
Multi-Way Switchgear Controller ETR606
3) Slave Address
Range
1 ~ 254
Default
1
Step
1
n Enter MODBUS Slave(ETR606) address.
4) Tx Delay
Range
0(OFF), 0.00 ~ 300.00 s
Default
0.05
Step
0.01 s
n Delay time of sending Real data after RTS Signal is on.
5) TCP/UDP Select
Range
TCP, UDP
Default
TCP
Step
-
n Select TCP or UDP communication at use of Ethernet port.
6) TCP Port
Range
1 ~ 65535
Default
502
Step
1
n Set TCP port number of ETR606.
7) UDP Port
Range
1 ~ 65535
Default
503
Step
1
n Set UDP port number of ETR606.
115
Multi-Way Switchgear Controller ETR606
(4) IEC61850 PROTOCOL
ETR606 can be programmed for communication using the IEC61850 through
Ethernet ports(Eth1 or Eth2).
Move to “MAIN MENU/ GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS/
IEC61850” to select setting for IEC61850 Protocol.
[IEC61850]
>Function:
Port Select:
Goose Msg':
DISABLE
ETH1
DISABLE
[ DISABLE/ENABLE ]
▲▼Move, ■Select, ●Return
[ LCD Screen ] IEC61850 Protocol Setting Menu Screen
1) Function
Range
DISABLE, ENABLE
Default
DISABLE
Step
-
n Set whether to use IEC61850 communication or not.
2) Port Select
Range
ETHERNET1, ETHERNET2
Default
ETHERNET1
Step
-
n Select IEC61850 communication port.
3) Goose Msg'
Range
DISABLE, ENABLE
Default
DISABLE
Step
-
n Select whether to use GOOSE (Generic Object Oriented Substation
Event).
116
Multi-Way Switchgear Controller ETR606
(5) SNTP PROTOCOL
ETR606 can be programmed for communication using the SNTP through Ethernet
ports(Eth1 and Eth2).
Move to “MAIN MENU/ GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS/
SNTP” to select setting for SNTP Protocol.
[SNTP]
>Function:
T-S Period:
SNTP IP 1:
SNTP IP 2:
SNTP IP 3:
DISABLE
3600
0
0
0
[DISABLE/ENABLE]
▲▼Move, ■Select, ●Return
[ LCD Screen ] SNTP Protocol Setting Menu Screen
1) Function
Range
DISABLE, ENABLE
Default
DISABLE
Step
-
n Select whether to use SNTP Protocol for Time Synchronization.
2) T-S Period
Range
0~60000s
Default
3600s
Step
1s
n Enter the time period for requesting time synchronization with the time
server.
3) SNTP IP 1~4
Range
0~255
Default
0
Step
1
n Enter the IP Address 1~4 for SNTP server.
117
Multi-Way Switchgear Controller ETR606
(6) SNMP PROTOCOL
ETR606 can be programmed for communication using the SNMP through Ethernet
ports(Eth1 and Eth2).
Move to “MAIN MENU/ GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS/
SNMP” to select setting for SNMP Protocol.
[SNMP]
>Function:
Accept PW:
DISABLE
00000000
[DISABLE/ENABLE]
▲▼Move, ■Select, ●Return
[ LCD Screen ] SNMP Protocol Setting Menu Screen
1) Function
Range
DISABLE, ENABLE
Default
DISABLE
Step
-
n Select whether to use SNMP Protocol for Time Synchronization.
n This setting supports SNMPv2c, SNMPv3.
2) Accept PW
Range
0 ~ z
Default
0
Step
-
n Set the accept password of SNMP Protoctol for SNMPv3, only.
118
Multi-Way Switchgear Controller ETR606
(7) ETIMS PROTOCOL
ETR606 can be setup for communication with ETIMS Interface Software through
Serial ports(RS232-1 or RS232-2) or Ethernet ports(Eth1 or Eth2).
Move to “MAIN MENU/ GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS/
ETIMS”.
[ETIMS]
>TCP Port No:
Packet Timeout:
K-Alv Idle Time:
K-Alv Interval:
K-Alv Retry:
Serial Func:
Serial Port:
30000
10
5
2
3
OFF
RS232-1
[30000~40000:1]
▲▼Move, ■Select, ●Return
[ LCD Screen ] SNMP Protocol Setting Menu Screen
1) TCP Port No
Range
30000~40000
Default
30000
Step
1
n Set the number of TCP Port for ETIMS Inteface Software.
2) Packet Timeout
Range
5~600
Default
10
Step
1
n Set Time-out for Data Packet receive error.
n Error message is displayed if the receiption is not appropriate for the
setting time during the receiption of data packet from ETIMS Interface
Software.
3) K-Alv Idle Time
119
Range
1~600
Default
5
Step
1
Multi-Way Switchgear Controller ETR606
n If
Idle
status
is
maintained
during
the
setting
time,
check
the
communication connecting maintainance status.
4) K-Alv Interval
Range
1~600
Default
2
Step
1
n After checking the communication connecting status, if there isn’t any
reply during the setting time, check again the status.
5) K-Alv Retry
Range
1~255
Default
3
Step
1
n Check the communication connecting maintainance status as much as
the setting number. If there isn’t a respond, take as communication fail
and close the communication connection.
6) Serial Func
Range
OFF, ON
Default
OFF
Step
-
n Set whether to use ETIMS through serial port.
7) Serial Port
Range
RS232-1, RS232-2
Default
RS232-1
Step
-
n Select Serial Communication Port for ETIMS Inface Software.
120
Multi-Way Switchgear Controller ETR606
7.1.2.2. PORTS
Place the cursor on “PORTS” in COMMUNICATION menu, press [ENT] button to
move into this menu. Communication ports of ETR606 is set and it has
sub-menus as below.
[PORT SETUP]
>1.RS232-1 Port
2.RS232-2 Port
3.RS485-1 Port
4.RS485-2 Port
5.Ethernet1 Port
6.Ethernet2 Port
7.Ethernet Option
▲▼Move, ■Select, ●Return
[ LCD Screen ] Ports Setting Menu Screen
(1) RS232-1 and RS232-2 Port
ETR606 side panel RS232-1 and RS232-2 ports and related elements are set.
Move
to
“MAIN
MENU/
GLOBAL
SETTING/
RS232-1” to select setting for RS232-1 port.
COMMUNICATION/
Also, settings for RS232-2 port
are same as below.
[RS232-1 PORT]
>Baud Rate:
9600
Parity Bit:
NONE
Data Bit:
8
Stop Bit:
1
Modem Select:
4W
CTS Usage:
ENABLE
DCD Usage:
DISABLE
RTS Usage:
AUTO
CTS CheckOut:
2
DCD CheckOut:
5000
TX PreDelay:
50
TX PostDelay:
10
BackOffRandom:
OFF
[1200 ~ 115200 bps]
▲▼Move, ■Select, ●Return
[ LCD Screen ] RS232-1 and RS232-2 Setting Menu Screen
121
PORTS/
Multi-Way Switchgear Controller ETR606
1) Baud Rate
Range
1200 ~ 115200 bps
Default
9600
Step
-
n Select the baud rate for RS232-1 port.
2) Parity Bit
Range
NONE, ODD, EVEN
Default
NONE
Step
-
n Select whether to use Parity Bit.
3) Data Bit
Range
7~8
Default
8
Step
1
n Select the data bit.
4) Stop Bit
Range
1~2
Default
1
Step
1
n Select the stop bit.
5) Modem Select
Range
2W, 4W, DIAL, NONE
Default
4W
Step
-
n Select a modem for communication.
n 2W : 2 wire private line is used and continuously Carrier is monitored
to control data flow by DCD(Data Carrier Detect).
n 4W : 4 wire private line is used and RTS(Request To Send) and
CTS(clear to Send) signal are used to control data flow.
n DIAL : Dial-Up modem is used.
n NONE : Not used.
122
Multi-Way Switchgear Controller ETR606
6) CTS Usage
Range
DISABLE, ENABLE
Default
DISABLE
Step
-
n Select whether to use CTS signal or not.
n ENABLE : Data is transferred after confirming CTS signal is Asserted.
n DISABLE : Data is transferred regardless of CTS signal.
7) DCD Usage
Range
DISABLE, ENABLE
Default
DISABLE
Step
-
n Select whether to use DCD signal or not.
n ENABLE : Data is transferred after confirming DCD signal is Deasserted.
n DISABLE : Data is transferred regardless of DCD signal.
8) RTS Usage
Range
OFF, ON, AUTO
Default
AUTO
Step
-
n ON : RTS signal of ETR606 is always ON(Assert).
n OFF : RTS signal of ETR606 is always OFF(Deassert).
n AUTO : On requesting data transfer to Modem, after RTS signal of
ETR606 is on and after data transfer completion, RTS signal of
ETR606 is off.
9) CTS Checkout
Range
1~255
Default
2
Step
1
n Set a waiting time that waits Modems confirmation on RTS signal
which informs that ETR606 is ready to transfer a data. If there is no
CTS response within a set time, RTU confirms CTS Fail and does not
transfer the data.
n It is available if ‘CTS Usage’ setting is ON.
123
Multi-Way Switchgear Controller ETR606
10) DCD Checkout
Range
10~30000ms
Default
5000ms
Step
10ms
n Set a delay time of DCD signal checks which determine modem status
before sending RTS signal in 2 wire communication type. After a set
time, if DCD signal is ON, ETR606 does not transfer the data and
treat it as DCD Fail. It is available if ‘DCD Usage’ setting is ON.
11) TX PreDelay
Range
0~20000ms
Default
50ms
Step
1ms
n Set tx pre-delay time. It delayed TX signal after CTS signal check.
12) TX PostDelay
Range
0~20000ms
Default
10ms
Step
1ms
n Set a tx post-delay time. It delayed RTS off after TX finished.
13) BackOffRandom
Range
0(OFF), 0~65535ms
Default
OFF
Step
1ms
n Set random back off time.
124
Multi-Way Switchgear Controller ETR606
(2) RS485-1 and RS485-2 Port
ETR606 side panel RS485-1 and RS485-2 ports and related elements are set.
Move
to
“MAIN
MENU/
GLOBAL
SETTING/
RS485-1” to select setting for RS485-1 port.
COMMUNICATION/
PORTS/
Also, settings for RS485-2 port
are same as below.
[RS485-1 PORT]
>Baud Rate:
Parity Bit:
Data Bit:
Stop Bit:
CA Delay:
9600
NONE
8
1
1.00
[1200 ~ 115200 bps]
▲▼Move, ■Select, ●Return
[ LCD Screen ] RS485-1 and RS485 Setting Menu Screen
1) Baud Rate
Range
1200 ~ 115200 bps
Default
9600
Step
-
n Select the baud rate for RS485-1 port.
n When receiving location information from a time synchronization device
(IRIG or GPS), this setting is fixed to 38400 bps.
n The location information of time synchronization device (IRIG or GPS)
can only be acquired through RS485-1 port. It does not work with the
RS485-2 port.
2) Parity Bit
Range
NONE, ODD, EVEN
Default
NONE
Step
-
n Select whether to use Parity Bit.
125
Multi-Way Switchgear Controller ETR606
3) Data Bit
Range
7~8
Default
8
Step
1
n Select the data bit.
4) Stop Bit
Range
1~2
Default
1
Step
1
n Select the stop bit.
5) CA Delay
Range
0.00~240.00s
Default
1.00s
Step
0.01s
n Set a delay time from data reced till transferring a reply data.
126
Multi-Way Switchgear Controller ETR606
(3) ETHERNET Ports
A. Ethernet 1 and Ethernet 2 Port
The ETR606 provides two Ethernet ports (ETH1 and ETH2) on the side panel.
Move to “MAIN MENU / GLOBAL SETTING / COMMUNICATION / PORTS /
ETHERNET1 PORT or EHTERNET2 PORT” to set up each Ethernet port. The
configuration menu of ETHERNET1 PORT and ETHERNET2 PORT are same and
are as follows;
[ETHERNET1 PORT]
>DHCP Func :
DISABLE
IP Addr Oct1:
192
IP Addr Oct2:
168
IP Addr Oct3:
7
IP Addr Oct4:
212
Gateway Oct1:
192
Gateway Oct2:
168
Gateway Oct3:
7
Gateway Oct4:
1
SubnetMask Oct1:
255
SubnetMask Oct2:
255
SubnetMask Oct3:
255
SubnetMask Oct4:
0
K-Alv Func:
ENABLE
K-Alv Idle Time:
4
K-Alv Interval:
2
K-Alv Retry:
3
[0~255:1]
▲▼Move, ■Select, ●Return
[ LCD Screen ] ETHERNET1 Port Setting Menu Screen
1) DHCP Func
Range
DISABLE, ENABLE
Default
DISABLE
Step
-
n Select whether to use DHCP(Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol)
function or not. if DHCP is enable, element is invalid below (IP,
gateway, subnetmask).
127
Multi-Way Switchgear Controller ETR606
2) IP Addr Oct1 ~ 4
Range
0 ~ 255
Default
IP Oct1 : 0
IP Oct2 : 0
IP Oct3 : 0
IP Oct4 : 212
Step
1
n Set IP address of ETR606.
n IP Address: 192.xxx.xxx.xxx
① ②
n
③ ④
Master IP Oct1,2,3,4 stands for ①,②,③,④.
n For example, in case main device IP address is ‘192.168.7.202’, it
shall be set as below.
-
Master IP Oct1 : 192
-
Master IP Oct2 : 168
-
Master IP Oct3 : 7
-
Master IP Oct4 : 212
3) Gateway Oct1 ~ 4
Range
0 ~ 255
Default
Gateway Oct1 : 192
Gateway Oct2 : 168
Gateway Oct3 : 7
Gateway Oct4 : 1
Step
1
n Set Gateway address. The setting method is identical to IP address
setting method.
4) Subnet Mask Oct1 ~ 4
Range
0 ~ 255
Default
Subnet Mask Oct1 : 192
Subnet Mask Oct2 : 168
Subnet Mask Oct3 : 7
Subnet Mask Oct4 : 212
Step
1
n Set Subnet Mask address. The setting method is identical to IP
address setting method.
128
Multi-Way Switchgear Controller ETR606
5) K-Alv Func
Range
DISABLE, ENABLE
Default
ENABLE
Step
-
n Select whether to use or not Ethernet communication connecting status
check function.
6) K-Alv Idle Time
Range
0(OFF), 1 ~ 600 sec
Default
4
Step
1 sec
n If Idle status is maintained during setting time, check communication
connecting maintenance status.
7) K-Alv Interval
Range
0(OFF), 1 ~ 600 sec
Default
2
Step
1 sec
n After checking the communication connecting status, if there isn’t any
reply during the setting time, check again the status.
8) K-Alv Retry
Range
0 ~ 255
Default
3
Step
1
n Check
communication
connecting
maintenance
status
as
much
as
setting number. If there isn’t a respond, take as communication fail
and close communication connection.
129
Multi-Way Switchgear Controller ETR606
B. Ethernet Ports Option
Move
to
“MAIN
MENU/
GLOBAL
SETTING/
COMMUNICATION/
PORTS/
ETHERNET OPTION” in order to configure option of Ethernet ports.
[ETHERNET OPTION]
>Default G/W:
ETH1
Network Mod:
INDIVID
[ETHERNET1/ETHERNET2]
▲▼Move, ■Select, ●Return
[ LCD Screen ] ETHERNET Option Setting Menu Screen
1) Default G/W
Range
ETHERNET1, ETHERNET2
Default
ETHERNET1
Step
-
n Set default gateway of Ethernet communication.
n When it sets ETH1 setting, configured Gateway on Ethernet 1 Port is
applied as default, When it sets ETH2 setting, configured Gateway on
Ethernet 2 Port is applied as default.
2) Network Mod
Range
INDIVID, BONDING
Default
INDIVID
Step
-
n Set Network Mode of Ethernet ports.
n INDIVID(INDIVIDUALIZE):
Ethernet
1
and
2
ports
are
used
independently.
n BONDING: The Ethernet 1 and 2 ports are bundled together, and the
port setting applies to the Ethernet 1 setting.
130
Multi-Way Switchgear Controller ETR606
7.1.2.3. DIALUP MODEM
ETR606 can support dial-up modem communication, Hayes-compatible, through
RS232-1 port and RS232-2 when their port types are both RS232.
(1) Configure modem with AT commands
Before
using
Modem
connected
with
ETR606,
following
setting
shall
be
confirmed.
Configure port speed(must be done)
Set Protocol communication speed the same as the speed between ETR606 and
Modem, and set Protocol communication speed slower than the speed between
modems.
Configure answer mode(frequently)
The modem will answer an incoming call on the second ring using the command
ATS0=2.
Configure Data Carrier Detect(must be done)
Data Carrier Detect should follow the presence or absence of a calling modem.
The AT command is AT&C1.
Configure Data Terminal Ready(must be done)
Data Terminal Ready should control the modem. If DTR is high, the modem is
ready to receive calls. If DTR is low, the modem should not receive any more
calls and should hang up any existing call.
The AT command is AT&D2.
Configure Data Set Ready(must be done)
Data Set Ready should verify the modem. DSR is always ON.
The AT command is AT&S0.
Configure no CONNECT messages(must be done)
A Hayes AT-style modem usually outputs a message when a call is received.
For example:
CONNECT 9600
The modem has a "quiet mode" that disables these messages.
The AT command is ATQ1. There will be no OK printed in response to this
command.
131
Multi-Way Switchgear Controller ETR606
Configure no echo of commands(must be done)
Echoing commands can confuse the console, so turn off command echoing.
The AT command is ATE0.
Configure silent connection(must be done)
Most modems have a speaker. By default this is connected whilst a modem is
connecting and negotiating a common protocol and speed. This is very useful for
a dialing modem, as it prevents a human being accidentally repeatedly called.
The speaker can be annoying on answering modems.
The AT command is ATM1.
(2) Operation functions when to use Dialing Modem
Transmitting a Communication Packet
Ÿ
Checks DCD is asserted(Check Online)
Ÿ
The Communication packet is transmitted
※. NOTE ) Dial when DCD is Deassert
Receiving a Communication Packet
Ÿ
Checks DCD is asserted(Check Online)
Ÿ
The Communication packet is received
※. NOTE ) If DCD is Deassert, receiving is not working.
Dialing
Ÿ
The user should insert an order for Reset.
Ÿ
Wait 0.5 second
Ÿ
Make a phone call by using Dialing String and Dialing Number.
Ÿ
Checks DCD is Asserted
※. NOTE ) Dial connection waiting time is depending on “ Data Link Timeout” set by the user.
Hang up
Ÿ
DTR Line is deasserted
Ÿ
Wait 2 second
Ÿ
DTR Line is asserted
Ÿ
Wait 2 second
※. NOTE ) ETR606 will hang up the modem after a delay of 30 seconds with no valid packet
received or transmitted.
132
Multi-Way Switchgear Controller ETR606
(3) Dialup Modem Setup
Place curser on “DIALUP MODEM” in COMMUNICATION menu, press [ENT]
button to move into this menu.
[DIALUP MODEM]
>1.RS232-1 Modem
2.RS232-2 Modem
▲▼Move, ■Select, ●Return
[ LCD Screen ]DIALUP MODEM Setting Menu Screen
Modem settings can be made individually for the RS232-1 and RS232-2 ports.
Move the cursor to the port you want to set and press [ENT] to enter. (These
ports have same settings.)
[RS232-1 MODEM]
>1.Calling String
2.Calling Number
3.Initial String
4.Connection
▲▼Move, ■Select, ●Return
[ LCD Screen ] RS232-1 and RS232-2 MODEM Setting Menu Screen
The settings for the dialup modem are shown below;
A. Calling String
In order to set “Calling String”, move to “MAIN MENU/ GLOBAL SETTING/
COMMUNICATION/ DIAL MODEM/ ... / CALLING STRING”.
[CALLING STRING]
>CS:
ATD
[ ! ~ z ]
▲▼Move, ■Select, ●Return
[ LCD Screen ] Calling String Setting Menu Screen
133
Multi-Way Switchgear Controller ETR606
1) CALLING STRING
Range
! ~z
Default
ATD
Step
-
n Set to use Dial-Up modem use. Select a dial string one among them.
n ATD : Default Dial Type(Already set in modem(Default Dial type)
n ATDT : Tone Dial
n ATDP : Pulse Dial
B. Calling Number
In order to set “Calling Number”, move to “MAIN MENU/ GLOBAL SETTING/
COMMUNICATION/ DIAL MODEM/ ... / CALLING NUMBER”.
[CALLING NUMBER]
>CN:
[ ! ~ z ]
▲▼Move, ■Select, ●Return
[ LCD Screen ] Calling Number Setting Menu Screen
1) CALLING NUMBER
Range
! ~z
Default
-
Step
-
n Insert call number to call to. [Modem(Master station) phone number].
Total 16 digits shall be used from first digit space and empty space
shall be filled up by ‘X’.
134
Multi-Way Switchgear Controller ETR606
C. Initial String
In order to set “Initial String”, move to “MAIN MENU/ GLOBAL SETTING/
COMMUNICATION/ DIAL MODEM/ ... / INITIAL STRING”.
>IS:
[INITIAL STRING]
AT&C1 Q1 E0 M0
&D2 +CRM=129
[ space ~ z ]
▲▼Move, ■Select, ●Return
[ LCD Screen ] Initial String Setting Menu Screen
1) INITIAL STRING
Range
SPACE ~ z
Default
AT&C1 Q1 E0 M0 &D2 + CRM = 129
Step
-
n Modem can be initialized by inserting total 30 figures of number,
character, space or special character.
n ETR606 should be reset before making a phone call(connection).
※. NOTE ) Continuous double Space or ‘/’ shall ignore next String.
D. CONNECTION
Move to “MAIN MENU/ GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ DIAL MODEM/ ...
/ CONNECTION”
[CONNECTION]
>Cmd Response TO:
Connect TO:
Idle Time:
SMS Function:
SMS Time:
SMS Type:
AT Cmd Retry:
AT Cmd TO:
2
30
60
OFF
5
MULTI
2
30
[0~255:1s]
▲▼Move, ■Select, ●Return
[ LCD Screen ] Dialup Modem Connection Setting Menu Screen
135
Multi-Way Switchgear Controller ETR606
1) Cmd Response TO
Range
0~255 s
Default
2
Step
1 s
n Setting Command response waiting time.
n If there is no response from a modem during setting time, it is
considered as a communication failure after setting time and status of
modem failure is maintained.
2) Connect TO
Range
0~255 s
Default
30
Step
1 s
n Setting Modem connection waiting time.
n If there is no connection during setting time, it is considered as a
connection failure after setting time, status of modem failure is
maintained.
3) Idle Time
Range
0~255 s
Default
60
Step
1 s
n Set the Command response waiting time.
n If there is no response from a modem during setting time, it is
considered as a communication failure after the setting time and the
status of modem failure is maintained.
4) SMS Func
Range
OFF, ON
Default
OFF
Step
1 s
n Set whether to use the Short Message Service (SMS) function.
n When using the SMS function, the phone number to send SMS
messages is set in the SMS Configuraton screen of ETIMS Interface
Software.
n For details on the phone number setting, refer to the "ETIMS Interface
Software User Manual".
136
Multi-Way Switchgear Controller ETR606
<Figure 7-10> SMS Configuration Screen of ETIMS Interface Software
5) SMS Time
Range
0~255 s
Default
30
Step
5 s
n Set the SMS Time.
n SMS Time is a waiting time to wait for response after a short
message of SMS is sent.
6) SMS Type
Range
SINGLE, MULTI
Default
MULTI
Step
-
n Set the type of SMS message. Single or Multiple type is supported for
SMS message.
n Single type is to send one event’s information(max. 25 characters)
including description and the occurring time of event in one SMS
message.
n Multiple type is to send maximum 4 events’ information(max. 11
characters respectively) including only description of each event in one
SMS message.
137
Multi-Way Switchgear Controller ETR606
n SMS message which is sent is applied only on event items which are
“YES” on SMS setting of Binary Input and Analog Input taps, DB Map
Configuraton screen of ETIMS Interface Software.
<Figure 7-11> DB Map Configuration Screen of ETIMS Interface Software
7) AT CMD Retry
Range
0~255 s
Default
2
Step
1 s
n Set retry number of AT Command.
n After sending AT Command, in the case of no responding error or
response, it is re-sent AT Command according to the setting number.
8) AT CMD TO
Range
1~65535 s
Default
30
Step
1 s
n Set retry number of AT Command.
n After sending AT Command, it’s waiting time until receiving response.
138
Multi-Way Switchgear Controller ETR606
7.1.2.4. FTP-SSL
Move to "MAIN MENU/ GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ FTP-SSL" in
order to configure protocol SSL to transfer file.
[FTP-SSL]
>Function:
Admin PW:
User 1 PW:
DISABLE
00000000
00000000
[DISABLE/ENABLE]
▲▼Move, ■Select, ●Return
[ LCD Screen ] FTP-SSL Setting Menu Screen
1) Function
Range
DISBALE, ENABLE
Default
DISBALE
Step
-
n Set whether FTP-SSL Fucntion is used or not.
2) Admin PW
Range
0 ~ z
Default
0
Step
-
n Set the administer password for FTP-SSL.
n Administer’s log-in account name is ‘entec_admin’ with read and write
authority.
3) User1 PW
Range
0 ~ z
Default
0
Step
-
n Set the user password for FTP-SSL.
n User 1’s log-in account name is ‘entec_user1’with read-only authority.
139
Multi-Way Switchgear Controller ETR606
7.1.2.5. WIFI (Option)
Move to “MAIN MENU/ GLOBAL SETTINGS/ COMMUNICATION/ WIFI” to set
the functions related Wifi.
[WIFI]
>WiFi SSID:
WiFi P/W:
SSID Hidden:
00000000
ab3456dc
OFF
[0 ~ z]
▲▼Move, ■Select, ●Return
[ LCD Screen ] Wifi Setting Menu Screen
1) Wifi SSID
Range
0 ~ z
Default
Lower 8 digits of Serial Number
Step
-
n Set the SSID (Service Set Identifier) of the wifi for Wifi access.
n It can be set up to 8 characters, special characters can not be set.
2) Wifi P/W
Range
0 ~ z
Default
ab3456dc
Step
-
n For wifi access, set WIFI password.
n It must be set to 8 characters.(numbers and letters)
3) SSID Hidden
Range
OFF, ON
Default
OFF
Step
-
n For selecting whether WIFI SSID is visible or not.
140
Multi-Way Switchgear Controller ETR606
(1) Wifi Connection Method
Wifi connection method of the recloser which has embedded wifi module is like
below Wifi . However, “Wifi Use” setting must be ON on “MAIN MENU/ GLOBAL
SETTINGS/ GENERAL/ DEVICE/ H/W OPTION”.
Step 1. Wifi Setting
On this menu, it can configure related Wifi functions. When installing wifi module,
you can set initially one time.
1) Set Wifi SSID (Service Set Identifier).
It’s possible to configure up to 8 characters.
It’s impossible to configure special characters.
Ex) 12345678
[WIFI]
>WiFi SSID:
WiFi P/W:
SSID Hidden:
12345678
ENTECENE
OFF
[0 ~ z]
▲▼Move, ■Select, ●Return
2) Set Wifi Password. Set to eight letters or numbers. Ex) ENTECENE
3) Set SSID Hidden as “OFF”. When it configures as “ON”, It can’t find out
ETR606 Wifi on Wifi list of PC that you want to connect.
Step 2. PC Wifi Connection
1) Find Wifi of ETR606 on Wifi list of PC.
Wifi of ETR606 is a string with Wifi SSID set in
“ENTEC-ENE-”. Ex) ENTEC-ENE-12345678
2) Connect to ET606 Wifi.
When connecting, don’t check “Connect automatically”.
141
Multi-Way Switchgear Controller ETR606
3) Enter the Wifi password in the ETR606.
Ex) ENTECENE
4) If
Wifi
of
ETR606
connection
is
done,
displayed as shown in the figure below.
Step 3. ETIMS Interface Software Wifi Connection
In order to communicate with ETR606
through
Wifi
on
ETIMS
Interface
Software, choose “Communication Port –
Wifi” as Connect Type.
142
it
is
Multi-Way Switchgear Controller ETR606
7.1.2.6. EVENT & ETC. SETUP
Place the cursor on “EVENT&ETC.” in COMMUNICATION menu, press [ENT]
button to move into this menu. In this menu, common items for ETR606
communication protocol settings can be set.
[EVENT&ETC.]
>AEvt Method:
OFF
AEvt Skip at Ft:
NO
DailyMax Ev:
DISABLE
Fault AI Ev:
1SHOT
BI EvtBuff Size:
256
AI EvtBuff Size:
256
CI EvtBuff Size:
256
BI Evt Method:
ALL
AI Evt Method:
ALL
CI Evt Method:
ALL
Evt Dlt Type:
FIRST
DO Cmd at Local:
OFF
Time Syn’ Src:
SCADA
Time Syn’ Ref:
LOCAL
Time Tag Type:
LOCAL
CI Frz Period:
OFF
[OFF/TH/DB/BOTH]
▲▼Move, ■Select, ●Return
[ LCD Screen ] Event & Etc. Setting Menu Screen
1) AEvt Method
Range
OFF, TH, DB, BOTH
Default
OFF
Step
-
n This setting value is applied only to the AI point with vitalized “Active
Event” in Communication Points DB Map.
- OFF : AI point event is not occurred.
- TH : Event is occurred when the AI point data is over or less than
Threshold value.
- DB : Event is occurred when the AI data change value is over the
Deadband value.
- BOTH : TH and DB all used.
n Use ETR606 interface program to setting the “Active Event” activation
or desactivation of AI point, the Threshold value and Deadband value.
143
Multi-Way Switchgear Controller ETR606
2) AEvt Skip at Ft
Range
NO, YES
Default
NO
Step
-
n Determine whether Threshold and Deadband AI event is generated
during Fault pickup.
3) DailyMax Ev
Range
DISABLE, ENABLE
Default
DISABLE
Step
n Select
the
[DISABLE/ENABLE]
of
Daily
Maximum
Load
Current
transmission.
- DISABLE : Do not process Daily Maximum Load Current Event.
- ENABLE : Process Daily Maximum Load Current.
4) Fault AI Ev
Range
NO, YES, 1SHOT
Default
1SHOT
Step
-
n When occurring fault, set whether or not record AI points which is
related with fault such as fault current.
- NO : Do not send the all Fault Current Sequence to Event.
- YES : Send all Fault Current Sequence to Event.
- 1SHOT : Send the first Sequence Fault Current of Fault Sequence to
Event.
5) F-AI Static Rst
Range
NO, YES
Default
NO
Step
-
n Set whether to reset the static value of the fault related AI points.
- NO : State value is maintained until the next fault.
- YES : State value becomes ‘0’ if the FI target is reset.
144
Multi-Way Switchgear Controller ETR606
6) BI EvtBuff Size
Range
32, 64, 128, 256
Default
256
Step
-
n Set the queue size of Binary Event.
7) AI EvtBuff Size
Range
32, 64, 128, 256
Default
256
Step
-
n Set the queue size of Analog Event.
8) CI EvtBuff Size
Range
32, 64, 128, 256
Default
256
Step
-
n Set the the queue size of Counter Event.
9) BI Evt Method
Range
ALL, LAST
Default
ALL
Step
-
n Set the binary event mode.
- ALL : all status is buffered for same point.
- LAST : Only last event is buffered for same point.
10) AI Evt Method
Range
ALL, LAST
Default
ALL
Step
-
n Set the analog event mode.
- ALL : all status is buffered for same point.
- LAST : Only last event is buffered for same point.
145
Multi-Way Switchgear Controller ETR606
11) CI Evt Method
Range
ALL, LAST
Default
ALL
Step
-
n Set the counter event mode.
- ALL : all status is buffered for same point.
- LAST : Only last event is buffered for same point.
12) Evt Dlt Type
Range
FIRST, LAST
Default
FIRST
Step
-
n Set the event to be deleted when the event buffer is full.
- FIRST : Delete the first event that is occurred.
- LAST : Delete the last event that is occurred.
13) DO Cmd at Local
Range
OFF, ON
Default
OFF
Step
-
n Set whether or not to control DO command on local control status.
14) Time Syn' Src
Range
SCADA, GPS, SNTP, ALL
Default
SCADA
Step
-
n Set Time Source for Time Synchronization.
n SCADA
:
It’s
synchronizing
possible
time
to
received
do
Time
from
Synchronization
master
station
only
of
by
SCADA
communication.
n GPS : Time Synchronization only by time information received from
Time Synchronization Module such as GPS or IRIG.
- Time
Synchronization
Module
should
be
installed
for
Time
Synchronization by this setting, and “IRIG Use” item of “MAIN
MENU / GLOBAL SETTINGS / GENERAL / DEVICE / H/W OPTION”
menu should be set to ON.
146
Multi-Way Switchgear Controller ETR606
- In this setting, time information is received periodically and time
synchronized.
n SNTP : Time Synchronization only is possible by Time Synchronizaion
control of SNTP communication.
n ALL : All the types of Time Synchronization by SCADA, GPS, SNTP is
applied.
15) Time Syn' Ref
Range
LOCAL, GMT
Default
LOCAL
Step
-
n Set Reference Time Type. It signifies the received time data type
when Time Synchronization.
※. NOTE ) This setting is set to be GMT and the setting values
associated with UTC(in “TIME ZONE” menu) are set up incorrectly,
the time internal clock in ETR606 can be changed incorrectly at time
synchronization.
16) Time Tag Type
Range
LOCAL, GMT
Default
LOCAL
Step
-
n Set the time type for occurred events in communication.
※. NOTE ) This setting is set to be UTC and the setting values
associated with GMT(in “TIME ZONE” menu) are set up incorrectly,
the time of event transmitted is not correct.
17) CI Frz Period
Range
0(OFF), 0~60000m
Default
OFF
Step
1m
n Set freeze period of CI points.
7.1.2.7. SAVE SETTINGS
From this menu, you can save the changed setting values of the COMMUNICATION
menu. The procedure for storing the set value is described in “6.7. Setting Save”.
147
Multi-Way Switchgear Controller ETR606
7.2. Common Event Recorder
Place the cursor on “2.EVENT” in Common Main Menu, press [ENT] button to
move into this menu.
ETR606 records all events during the operation, occurred events are recorded
separately such as operation event, fault event, fault wave, system event, set
change event, and diagnostic event. All events are recorded in order(FIFO). In
this menu, all events can be checked and deleted. Also, all events can be
checked in ETIMS Interface Software.
[EVENT]
>1.Operation
2.Fault
3.Fault Wave
4.System
5.Set Change
6.Dignostic
7.Clear Saved Data
▲▼Move, ■Select, ●Return
[ LCD Screen ] Event Menu Screen
NOTE: The recorded event items and the maximum number of events may
vary depending on the user's requirements, options and versions of
ETR606.
148
Multi-Way Switchgear Controller ETR606
7.2.1. Operation Events
Operation event records max. 1,000 events. When each switchgear circuit
operates(OPEN/CLOSE), operation status and control signal(LOCAL, REMOTE,
etc.) is recorded in operation event.
Move to “MAIN MENU / EVENT / OPERATION” to confirm operation events.
[OPERATION]
No.0001/1000
[OPERATION]
No.0002/1000
[OPERATION]
No.0003/1000
Circuit
: 6 WAY
Circuit
: 5 WAY
Circuit
: 4 WAY
Event
Control
Result
: CLOSE
: PANEL HMI
: SUCCESS
Event
Control
Result
: CLOSE
: PANEL HMI
: SUCCESS
Event
Control
Result
: CLOSE
: PANEL HMI
: SUCCESS
08/03/2021 20:02:40:501
▲▼Move, ●Return
08/03/2021 20:01:40:501
▲▼Move, ●Return
08/03/2021 20:00:35:217
▲▼Move, ●Return
[▼][▲] are used to check event. [0001/1000] is the latest event record.
Trigger Source
Closing or Opening operation of each switchgear circuit
Operation Event Information
n CIRCUIT : Operated circuit number (1 ~ 6 Way)
n EVENT
- CLOSE : Closing operation of each switchgear circuit
- OPEN : Opening operation of each switchgear circuit
n CONTROL
- PANEL HMI : Operation through control button at the front panel
- REMOTE : Operation through remote control
- MANUAL : Switchgear’s circuit mechanical manual operation.
- AUTO : Automatic operation through ETR606 function
- EXTERNAL
: Operation through
external command (External command
condition is available through PLC configuration)
n RESULT : Operation Result
Trigger Time
Monitor changes of Trigger source status in every 5 msec.
Trigger Capacity
Stores last 1,000 events.
149
Multi-Way Switchgear Controller ETR606
7.2.2. Fault Events
Fault event records max 300 events. Fault event records fault occurred time, fault
phase, fault current magnitude and each phase fault records can be checked.
Move to “MAIN MENU / EVENT / FAULT” to confirm fault events.
[FAULT]
[FAULT]
No.001/300
No.002/300
Circuit : 1 WAY-SW
F.Target: ABC__
Flt Type: Permanent Fault
Flt Dir': ________
Circuit : 2 WAY-CB
F.Target: __CG_ TOC
Flt Type: 51
Flt Dir': FORWARD
Seq':1
IA:
300A
IB:
300A
IC:
300A
IG:
0A
08/03/2021 09:24:09:433
▲▼Move, ●Return
IA:
0A
IB:
0A
IC:
300A
IG:
300A
08/03/2021 08:29:05:213
▲▼Move, ●Return
[▼][▲] buttons are used to check fault events. [001/300] is the latest event
record.
Trigger Source
Fault Trip(applied when C/B type) or Fault(FI) Detection(applied when S/W type)
Fault Event Information
n Circuit : Circuit number(1 ~ 6 Way) and type(CB or SW) where the fault occurred
n F.Target : Fault Target and Overcurrent Trip Type
- Fault Target : Fault occurrence phase (A, B, C, G(Ground) and Q(Negative Seq’))
- Overcurrent Fault Type (applied when C/B type)
ü TOC : Time Delay Overcurrent Trip
ü IOC : Instantaneous Overcurrent Trip
n Flt Type
- Fault Type (applied when C/B type)
ü 51 : Time Delay Overcurrent Fault
ü 50 : Instantaneous Overcurrent Fault
ü 27 : Under Voltage Fault
ü 59 : Over Voltage Fault
ü 81U : Under Frequency Fault
ü 81O : Over Frequency Fault
150
Multi-Way Switchgear Controller ETR606
- Fault Type (applied when S/W type)
ü FI-# Shot : Fault Indication Detection(# : Fault shot number)
ü Permanent : Permanent Fault
ü Temporary : Temporary Fault
n Flt Dir’ : Fault Direction
- FORWARD : Forward Fault
- REVERSE : Reverse Fault
n Seq’ : Fault Trip Sequence Number (applied when C/B type)
n Fault Current(IA/IB/IC/IG) : Max. value of each phase is indicated when fault
is occurred.
Trigger Time
Moniters changes of Trigger source status in every 1/4 cycle.
Trigger Capacity
Stores last 300 events.
7.2.3. Fault Waves - Summary
Fault wave is recorded up to 32 fault waves. Fault wave information is displayed
on LCD. Captured waveform can be checked in ETIMS Interface Software.
However, if the ‘Wave Record’ setting in the “MAIN MENU/ GENERAL/ EVENT
RECORDER” menu is OFF, fault cycles will not be recorded.
Move to “MAIN MENU / EVENT / FAULT WAVE” to confirm fault cycle
summary.
[FAULT WAVE]
No.01/32
[FAULT WAVE]
No.01/32
Circuit
Event
Circuit
Event
IA:
IC:
: 3 WAY
: EWTRIG1&EWTRIG2
300A
300A
IB:
IG:
300A
0A
08/03/2021 09:24:09:433
▲▼Move, ●Return
IA:
IC:
: 2 WAY
: EWTRIG1&EWTRIG2
0A
300A
IB:
IG:
0A
300A
08/03/2021 08:29:05:213
▲▼Move, ●Return
[▼][▲] buttons are used to check fault events. [01/32] is the latest event
record.
151
Multi-Way Switchgear Controller ETR606
Trigger Source
n Fault wave captured (Fault pickup, Fault dection and Fault Trip)
Fault Wave Information
n Circuit : Circuit number of which the Fault Wave is captured. (1 ~ 6 Way)
n Event : Fault wave captured time.
- EWTRIG1 : Fault pick up time.
- EWTRIG2 : Fault detection time(applied when S/W type) or trip time(applied
when C/B type).
- EWTRIG1&2 : Fault pickup & Fault detection time(applied when S/W type)
or Fault pickup & Fault trip time(applied when C/B type).
n Fault Current(IA/IB/IC/IG) : A phase, B phase, C phase and Ground current
when capturing the waveform.
Trigger Time
Moniters changes of Trigger source status in every 1/4 cycle.
Trigger Capacity
Maximum 32 events are recorded.
Recoder Cycle Length
120 cycles for 32 sampling and 240 cycles for 16 sampling.
7.2.4. System Events
The system event records and indicates up to 1,000 max.
Move to “MAIN MENU / EVENT / SYSTEM” to confirm system events.
[SYSTEM]
No.0001/1000
[SYSTEM]
No.0002/1000
Event
Status
Event
Status
: 51P13T
: LO/DEASSERT
: ETR3
: LO/DEASSERT
* Description *
Phase Time Delay Overcurr
ent (51P-1) Timeout : 3..
* Description *
Equation Trip Conditions
: 3 Way
08/26/2021 09:36:54:804
▲▼Move, ●Return
08/26/2021 09:36:54:804
▲▼Move, ●Return
[▼][▲] button is used to check the records. [0001/1000] is the latest event
record.
152
Multi-Way Switchgear Controller ETR606
Trigger Source
Triggers when the status of the below logics changes:
n Protection element
n 52A Contact
n Sequence status
n Front panel control
n AC supply
n External control
n Fail operation
n External input status
n System alarm
n Sleep mode
n Gas Status, etc.
System Event Information
n Event : Recorded event logic
n Status : Change status of the event logic (HI/ASSERT or LO/DEASSERT)
n Description : Description of the recorded event logic
Trigger Time
Monitors changes of Trigger source status in every 1/4 cycle.
Storage Capacity
Stores last 1,000 events.
153
Multi-Way Switchgear Controller ETR606
7.2.5. Set Change Events
The set change event records and indicates up to 500 max.
Move to “MAIN MENU / EVENT / SET CHANGE” to confirm set change events.
[SET CHANGE]
No.001/500
[SET CHANGE]
No.002/500
Circuit: 3 WAY
Circuit: COMMON
Event : PRI' SET CHANGE
Control: by ETIMS
Event : GLOBAL SET CHANGE
Control: by ETIMS
08/26/2021 09:23:57:168
▲▼Move, ●Return
08/26/2021 08:48:01:409
▲▼Move, ●Return
[▼][▲] button is used to check the records.
[001/500] is the latest event
record.
Trigger Source
Triggers when the setting items are changed.
Set Change Event Information
n Circuit : Location(Circuit/Common) where the setting have been changed
(COMMON, 1 ~ 6 Way)
n Event : Setting change event item
- GLOBAL SET Change
- PRI’(Primary) SET Change
- ALT’(Alternate) SET Change
n Control : Change method
- by LOCAL: Set change at local
- by REMOTE: Set change in remote
- by ETIMS : Set change by ETIMS Interface software
Trigger Time
Monitors changes of Trigger source status in every 5 msec.
Storage Capacity
Stores last 500 events.
154
Multi-Way Switchgear Controller ETR606
7.2.6. Diagnostic Events
The diagnostic event records and indicates up to 500 max.
Move to “MAIN MENU / EVENT / DIAGNOSTIC” to confirm diagnostic events.
[DIAGNOSTIC]
No.001/500
Event
Status
: DIGERR
: HI/ASSERT
[DIAGNOSTIC]
No.002/500
Event
Status
: DIGARM
: HI/ASSERT
* Description *
Diagnostic Error Status
* Description *
Diagnostic Alarm Status
08/26/2021 10:20:25:934
▲▼Move, ●Return
08/26/2021 10:20:25:934
▲▼Move, ●Return
[▼][▲] button is used to check the events. [001/500] is the latest event record.
Trigger Source
Triggers when the state of the logic related to the system diagnosis is changed
as shown below:
n DSP Fail
n ADC Fail
n RTC Fail
n Memory Fail
n Flash-Rom Fail
n Circuit voltage Fail
n Global Setting Fail
n Group Setting Fail
n Event Fail
n Count Fail
n DO Fail
n Close Fail
n Open Fail, etc.
System Event Information
n Event : Recorded event logic
n Status : Change status of the event logic (HI/ASSERT or LO/DEASSERT)
n Description : Description of the recorded event logic
155
Multi-Way Switchgear Controller ETR606
Trigger Time
Monitors changes of Trigger source status in every 1/4 cycle.
Storage Capacity
Stores last 500 events.
7.2.7. Clear Saved Data
Move to “MAIN MENU / EVENT / CLEAR SAVED DATA” to clear saved events.
Passcode 3 certification is required to enter “CLEAR SAED DATA” menu.
[Table 7-3] Clear Save Data
Main Menu (Common) / Event / Clear Saved Data
[CLEAR SAVED DATA]
1.Operation
2.Fault
3.Fault Wave
4.System
5.Set Change
6.Diagnostic
7.Above All
▲▼Move, ■Select, ●Return
[CLEAR SAVED DATA]
* CLEAR EVENT *
EVENT CLEAR SUCCESS
▲▼Move, ■Select, ●Return
156
Clear Saved Data
Select an item to delete and press [ENT]
button.
If
deleting
is
completed,
“EVENT
SUCCESS” message is displayed.
7. Above All
1 ~ 7 items are all deleted.
CLEAR
Multi-Way Switchgear Controller ETR606
7.3. Maintenance
Place the cursor on “MAINTENANCE” in Main menu, press [ENT] button to
move into this menu. Maintenance information, which is commonly maintained for
all the circuits, is displayed in this menu.
This menu has sub-menu as below and by pressing [ENT] button, move into
sub-menu.
[MAINTENANCE]
>1.Count
2.Data Reset
3.Controller Information
▲▼Move, ■Select, ●Return
[ LCD Screen ] Maintenance Menu Screen
7.3.1. Control Count
Move to “MAIN MENU / MAINTENANCE / COUNT / Control Count” to check the
control counts of the ETR606.
[Table 7-4] Control Count
Main Menu (Common) / Maintenance / Count / Control Count
Restart Count
[COUNT]
Restart Count
:
Diagnostic Count :
0
0
ETR606 restart number is displayed.
Diagnostic Count
ETR606 diagnostic count is displayed.
●Return
157
Multi-Way Switchgear Controller ETR606
7.3.2. Maintenance Data Reset
Move to “MAIN MENU / MAINTENANCE / DATA RESET”. This menu resets
COUNT and Maintenance data. Passcode 3 certification is required to enter
“CLEAR SAVED DATA” menu.
[Table 7-5] Maintenance Data Reset
Main Menu (Common) / Maintenance / Data Reset
[DATA RESET]
1.Control Count
2.Count All
3.Communication Buffer
4.Above All
Saved Data Reset
Select an item to delete and press [ENT]
button.
If
deleting
is
completed,
“DATA
CLEAR SUCCESS” message is displayed.
4. Above All
▲▼Move, ■Select, ●Return
All count data of 1 ~ 3 menus are reset at
once.
[DATA RESET]
* CLEAR DATA *
DATA CLEAR SUCCESS
▲▼Move, ■Select, ●Return
7.3.3. Controller Information
Move to “MAIN MENU / MAINTENANCE / CONTROLLER INFORMATION” to
confirm ETR606 controller information. In this menu, information such as option,
version and serial number of current ETR606 is displayed.
158
Multi-Way Switchgear Controller ETR606
7.4. Time
Place the cursor on “TIME” in Main menu, press [ENT] button to move in this
menu.
[Table 7-6] Time Check and Set
Main Menu (Common) / Time
[TIME]
In this menu, you can check and set the
current date and time. This menu applies local
* CURRENT TIME *
2021/08/26 14:01:17
Press <ENT> to Set Time
■Time Set, ●Return
[TIME]
* SETTING TIME *
time and UTC time is managed internally
depending on the time zone setting.
Here's how to change the present date
and time ;
n Press [ENT] button to select and change a
setting.
n To change a number, use [▲][▼] button
2021/08/26 14:01:17
and
USE [UP/DOWN/ENT]
button.
Press <FUN> to Abort
▲▼Change, ■Move/Ent, ●Abort
to
move
next
item,
press
[ENT]
n To save all changed setting, press [ENT].
If
“GLOBAL
SETTING
/
GENERAL
/
DEVICE / TIME ZONE / Time Syn’ Type” is
“GMT” and “GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL /
DEVICE / H/W OPTION / IRIG Use” is
turned “ON” then, do not set current time
manually.
159
Multi-Way Switchgear Controller ETR606
7.5. Status
Place the cursor on “STATUS”
in Main menu, press [ENT] button to move in
this menu. This menu has sub-menu as below. Press [ENT] to move into
sub-menu.
[STATUS]
>1.ETR606 Status
2.Input Ports
3.Output Ports
▲▼Move, ■Select, ●Return
[ LCD Screen ] Status Menu Screen
7.5.1. ETR606 Status
Move to “MAIN MENU / STATUS / ETR606 STATUS” to confirm switchgear
tank and controller status.
[Table 7-7] ETR606 Status (1/3)
Main Menu (Common) / Status / ETR606 Status
[ETR606 STATUS]
>Control Status :
Gas Status
:
Batt&Charge St. :
Power Status
:
AC Power Input :
DC Power Input :
Door Status
:
Restart Count
:
Temperature
:
Battery Voltage :
Charger Voltage :
MPU Version
:
DSP Version
:
CPU Version
:
▲▼Move, ●Return
Present switchgear tank and ETR606 status
NORMAL
NORMAL
NORMAL
NORMAL
ON
ON
OPENED
1
37°C
24.00 V
24.00 V
Ver.1.0
Ver.1.0
Ver.1.0
are displayed. Use
[▼] [▲] button to check
all items.
Control Status
It displays diagnostic information of ETR606.
n NORMAL:
It
displays
normal
status
of
ETR606.
n WARNING: It displays diagnostic alarm of
ETR606.
n ERROR:
It
displays
ETR606.
In
this
diagnostic
status,
error
ETR606
is
of
in
significantly abnormal satus so, ETR606
sometimes
switchgear.
160
blocks
to
Open/Close
Multi-Way Switchgear Controller ETR606
[Table 7-7] ETR606 Status (2/3)
Main Menu (Common) / Status / ETR606 Status
[ETR606 STATUS]
>Control Status :
Gas Status
:
Batt&Charge St. :
Power Status
:
AC Power Input :
DC Power Input :
Door Status
:
Restart Count
:
Temperature
:
Battery Voltage :
Charger Voltage :
MPU Version
:
DSP Version
:
CPU Version
:
▲▼Move, ●Return
Gas Status
NORMAL
NORMAL
NORMAL
NORMAL
ON
ON
OPENED
1
37°C
24.00 V
24.00 V
Ver.1.0
Ver.1.0
Ver.1.0
It displays switchgear tank’s gas pressure
status(NORMAL, ALARM, LOW and HIGH).
Batt&Charge St.
It
displays
battery
and
charger
status
(NORMAL, FAIL).
Power Status
It
displays
power
down
status
(NORMAL,
DOWN(AC Fail & Low Battery)).
AC Power Input
It displays AC power(external power supply)
input status (ON, FAIL).
DC Power Input
It displays DC power(backup battery) input
status (ON, FAIL).
Door Status
It
displays
control
box’s
door
status
(OPENED, CLOSED).
Restart Count
It displays the number count of how many
times the device has restarted.
Temperature
It displays the internal temperature of ETR606.
Battery Voltage
It displays the voltage of the battery.
Charger Voltage
It displays the voltage of the charger.
161
Multi-Way Switchgear Controller ETR606
[Table 7-7] ETR606 Status (3/3)
Main Menu (Common) / Status / ETR606 Status
[ETR606 STATUS]
>Control Status :
Gas Status
:
Batt&Charge St. :
Power Status
:
AC Power Input :
DC Power Input :
Door Status
:
Restart Count
:
Temperature
:
Battery Voltage :
Charger Voltage :
MPU Version
:
DSP Version
:
CPU Version
:
▲▼Move, ●Return
MPU Version
NORMAL
NORMAL
NORMAL
NORMAL
ON
ON
OPENED
1
37°C
24.00 V
24.00 V
Ver.1.0
Ver.1.0
Ver.1.0
Current MPU version is displayed.
DSP Version
Current DSP version is displayed.
CPU Version
Current CPU version is displayed.
7.5.2. Input Ports
Move to MAIN MENU / STATUS / INPUT PORTS” to confirm input ports's
status.
[Table 7-8] Input Ports’s Status
Main Menu (Common) / Status / Input Ports
[INPUT PORTS]
>IN101:
OFF IN203:
IN102:
OFF IN204:
IN103:
OFF IN205:
IN104:
OFF IN206:
IN105:
OFF IN207:
IN106:
OFF IN208:
IN107:
OFF IN209:
IN108:
OFF IN210:
IN201:
OFF IN211:
IN202:
OFF IN212:
▲▼Move, ●Return
:
>IN329:
IN330:
IN331:
IN332:
[INPUT PORTS]
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
Displays 64 input ports’ status.
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
IN101 ~ IN108 and IN201 ~ IN224
Displays the status of the input ports located
on the side panel of the ETR606.
IN301 ~ IN332
Displays the feedback status of the output
ports
located
on
the
side
panel
of
the
ETR606.
Depending on output signal, “ON” or “OFF” is
displayed.
[▼] [▲] button is used to check all input
port’s status.
▲▼Move, ●Return
162
Multi-Way Switchgear Controller ETR606
7.5.3. Output Ports
Move to “MAIN MENU / STATUS / OUTPUT PORTS” to confirm input ports's
status.
[Table 7-9] Output Ports’s Status
Main Menu (Common) / Status / Output Ports
[OUTPUT PORTS]
>OUT101:
ON OUT203:
OUT102:
ON OUT204:
OUT103:
ON OUT205:
OUT104:
ON OUT206:
OUT105:
ON OUT207:
OUT106:
ON OUT208:
OUT107:
OFF OUT209:
OUT108:
OFF OUT210:
OUT201:
OFF OUT211:
OUT202:
OFF OUT212:
▲▼Move, ●Return
163
Displays 20 output ports’ status.
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OUT101 ~ OUT108 and OUT201 ~ OUT212
Displays the output status of the output ports
located on the side panel of the ETR606.
Depending on output signal, “ON” or “OFF” is
displayed.
Multi-Way Switchgear Controller ETR606
7.6. Metering
Place the cursor on “METERING” in Main menu, press [ENT] button to move in
this menu. This menu has sub-menu as below. Press [ENT] to move into sub-menu.
[METERING]
>1.Frequency
2.DC Channel
3.Control Reference
▲▼Move, ■Select, ●Return
[ LCD Screen ] Metering Menu Screen
7.6.1. Frequency
Following values are contained in Frequency metering.
n 1-WAY: Metering value of present 1 way frequency is indicated.
n 4-WAY: Metering value of present 4 way frequency is indicated.
n Slip: Frequency difference between the 1 way and the 4 way is indicated.
You can confirm in “MAIN NEMU / METERING / FREQUENCY”
[Table 7-10] Frequency Metering
Main Menu (Common) / Metering / Frequency
[FREQUENCY]
Frequency Display
1-WAY:
4-WAY:
0.00 Hz
0.00 Hz
0.00 Hz/s
0.00 Hz/s
1-WAY
Slip :
0.00 Hz
0.00 °
n Frequency of 1 way (Hz)
n Frequency decay rate of 1 way (Hz/sec)
●Return
4-WAY
n Frequency of 4 way (Hz)
n Frequency decay rate of 4 way (Hz/sec)
Slip
n Frequency difference between 1 way and 4
way : Slip frequency (Hz)
n Phase difference between 1 way and 4
way : Slip angle (deg°)
164
Multi-Way Switchgear Controller ETR606
7.6.2. DC Channel
You can confirm in “MAIN MENU / METERING / DC CHANNEL”.
[Table 7-11] DC Channel Metering
Main Menu (Common) / Metering / DC Channel
Displays the measured values of DC analog
[DC CHANNEL]
input ports located on the side panel of
DC1
DC2
DC3
DC4
:
:
:
:
0.00
0.00
24.00
24.00
ETR606.
In case of manufacturer default wiring, each
input port is applied as follows.
●Return
DC1 and DC2
Measured value of spare analog input
DC3
Measured value of Battery voltage
DC4
Measured value of Charging circiut voltage
165
Multi-Way Switchgear Controller ETR606
7.6.3. Control Reference
You can confirm in “MAIN MENU / METERING / CONTROL REFERENCE”.
[Table 7-12] Control Reference Metering
Main Menu (Common) / Metering / Control Reference
[CONTROL REFERENCE]
Battery Voltage :
24.00 V
Charger Voltage :
24.00 V
Battery Capacity:
100.00 %
Temperature
:
35°C
System Pow.+12V :
12.00 V
System Pow.-12V :
-12.00 V
Ref. Voltage
:
2.50 V
In
this
menu,
the
reference
measurement
value for checking the condition of ETR606 is
displayed.
Battery Voltage
Displays the battery voltage.
●Return
Charger Voltage
Displays the voltage of charge circuit.
Battery Capacity
Displays
battery
capacity
by
‘Battery
Management’ function.
Temperature
Displays the internal temperature of ETR606.
System Pow.+12V
Displays +12V system power measurement
value.
System Pow.-12V
Displays -12V system power measurement
value.
Ref. Voltage
Displays reference voltage 2.5V measurement
value.
166
Multi-Way Switchgear Controller ETR606
8. CIRCUIT MAIN MENU
It moves to main menu if [FUN] key is pressed in initial screen of each way of
switchgear and moves to initial screen if pressed in main menu. The main menu
has following submenus.
The submenus in 'GROUP SETTING' menu for a switch part(S/W type) and for a
way of circuit breaker part(C/B type) are different in each other. Other menus,
however, for S/W type and for C/B type consist of same submenus.
[MAIN MENU (SW) – 1 WAY]
>1.Group Settings
2.Event
3.Maintenance
4.Status
5.Metering
▲▼Move, ■Select, ●Return
[ LCD screen ] Main Menu Screen
8.1. Group Settings
It moves to this menu if [ENT] key is pressed after locating cursor in “1.
GROUP SETTING” in 'MAIN MENU'. The fault detection functions(S/W type) and
protection elements(C/B type) are set in this menu and it has following
submenus.
[GROUP SETTINGS]
>1.Primary
2.Alternate
▲▼Move, ■Select, ●Return
[ LCD Screen ] Group Settings Menu Screen
The group settings menu has 2 identical subgroup settings. User can set different
settings in either primary or in alternate group and use them upon their needs.
Group setting (primary or alternate) for each circuit is selectable by local and
remote communication. In addition, it is possible to check the currently applied
group setting remotely or locally;
167
Multi-Way Switchgear Controller ETR606
n It is possible to check and select the group
setting for each circuit through the “MAIN
MANU (COMMON) / GENERAL / DEVICE /
ACTIVE SET GROUP” menu.
[ACTIVE SET GROUP]
>1 WAY:
PRIMARY
2 WAY:
PRIMARY
3 WAY:
PRIMARY
4 WAY:
PRIMARY
5 WAY:
PRIMARY
6 WAY:
PRIMARY
[ PRIMARY/ALTERNATE ]
▲▼Move, ■Select, ●Return
n Group settings fo each circuit can be remotely changed through Binary
output(BO) points.
: Primary/Alternate Set Group Change – 1~6 Way
n Currently applied group settings for each circuit can be remotely checked
through Binary input(BI) points.
: Primary Set Group Enabled – 1~6 Way
: Alternate Set Group Enabled – 1~6 Way
8.1.1. Group Settings for Switch(S/W) type
The S/W type menus are divided into 3 groups, both Primary and Alternate
settings have these same submenus.
[PRIMARY – 1 WAY(SW)]
>1.Fault Indication
2.Monitoring
3.Auto Section
*.Save Settings
▲▼Move, ■Select, ●Return
[ LCD Screen ] Group Setting Menu Screen for S/W type
Caution : Changed set valued must be saved to be applied. When escaping
from "*. SAVE SETTINGS" menu or moving to high menu, changed
set value is saved by 'Changed set value saved message'.
168
Multi-Way Switchgear Controller ETR606
8.1.1.1. FAULT INDICATION
Place the cursor on “Fault Indication” in Primary/Alternate setting menu, press
[ENT] button to move into this menu.
This menu activates the fault indication element.
[FAULT INDICATION – 1 WAY]
>1.FI Type
2.Pickup Current
3.FI Delay Time
4.Inrush Restraint
5.Direction
6.FI Auto Reset
▲▼Move, ■Select, ●Return
[ LCD Screen ] Fault Indication Setting Menu Screen
(1) FI TYPE
This menu sets the detection type of fault indication(FI). According to this
setting, the fault indication detection method is applied differently.
[FI TYPE – 1 WAY(SW)]
>Type Select:
IV
[ IV/I ]
▲▼Move, ■Select, ●Return
[ LCD Screen ] FI Type Setting Menu Screen
1) Type Select
Range
IV, I
Default
IV
Step
-
n Select the type of FI(fault indicator) detection.
n IV : If dead line state after experiencing a fault current, FI is detected.
When using the Auto Section function menu, the FI Type setting must
be "IV" for correct Auto Section operation.
n I : If fault current maintains during the fault delay time(Type I delay),
FI is detected.
※. NOTE ) See “8.1.1.1.(3) FI DELAY TIME” for details on FI Types.
169
Multi-Way Switchgear Controller ETR606
(2) PICKUP CURRENT
This menu sets fault pickup current for fault indication (FI). Fault pickup current
is individually set for Phase and Ground current.
[PICKUP CURRENT – 1 WAY]
>Phase:
500
Ground:
250
Neg Seq':
OFF
[O(OFF), 5~1600:1 A]
▲▼Move, ■Select, ●Return
[ LCD Screen ] Pickup Current Setting Menu Screen
1) Phase
Range
0(OFF), 5~1600A
Default
500A
Step
1A
n Set the minimum pickup current to detect phase fault indication.
n The 'PROTECTION ENABLED' LED of relevant way on the front panel
must be ON for a phase fault indication(FI).
2) Ground
Range
0(OFF), 5~1600A
Default
250A
Step
1A
n Set the minimum pickup current to detect ground fault indication.
n The 'PROTECTION ENABLED' and 'GROUND ENABLED' LEDs of
relevant way on the front panel must be ON for a ground fault
indication (FI).
3) Neg Seq’
Range
0(OFF), 5~1600A
Default
OFF
Step
1A
n Set the minimum pickup current to detect negative sequence fault
indication.
n The 'PROTECTION ENABLED' LED of relevant way on the front panel
must be ON for a negative sequence fault indication(FI).
170
Multi-Way Switchgear Controller ETR606
(3) FI DELAY TIME
This menu sets the delay times for fault indication(FI) detection.
[FI DELAY TIME – 1 WAY]
>Permanent:
20.00
Temporary:
2.00
Type I Delay:
0.03
[0.00~600.00:0.01s]
▲▼Move, ■Select, ●Return
[ LCD Screen ] Pickup Current Setting Menu Screen
1) Permanent
Range 0.00~600.00 s
Default
20s
Step
0.01s
n Set delay time for Permanent Fault Detection. In case FI Type is ‘IV’
Type, this setting is applied.
2) Temporary
Range 0.00~600.00 s
Default
Step
2s
0.01s
n Set delay time for Temporary Fault Detection. In case FI Type is ‘IV’
Type, this setting is applied.
3) Type I Delay
Range 0.00~600.00 s
Default
0.03s
Step
0.01s
n Set delay time for Fault Detection in ‘I’ FI Type.
There are ‘IV’ Type and ‘I’ Type of FI Detect Mode. The description for each
type follows;
171
Multi-Way Switchgear Controller ETR606
A. ‘IV’ FI Type
Fault Indicator has PERMANENT mode and TEMPORARY mode, it operates
depending upon a fault of Current and Voltage.
After a Line fault(C/B Trip), Fault Indicator is ready to operate. After C/B
connection, if the fault disappears, Temporary FI operates after a certain time
and Permanent FI is RESET.
After C/B connection, if the fault remains(C/B TRIP), after a certain time, it is
figured as permanent fault, Permanent FI operates and Temporary FI is reset.
PERMANENT mode shall have enough Permanent Set Time considering cycle of
C/B reclosing.
① ‘IV' Type - Permanent FI Detect
It is used for the permanent FI detection of distribution line and it operates
according to following condition.
Voltage
Pickup Level
Current
Temporary
FI SETTING TIME
Permanent
FI SETTING TIME
CLEAR
Temporary FI
Permanent FI
FI SET
AUTO
RESET
Permanent Fault
<Figure 8-1> Permanent FI Detection (1)
172
Multi-Way Switchgear Controller ETR606
Occurrence Condition
FI information is set when becomes dead line status after fault current over the
minim. pickup current flowed
in live line status, and set the fault type in FI if
dead line status is maintained during setting time (permanent FI Delay Time,
0~600sec possible to change, Default: 20 second). But, when returns to live line
status by reclosing before the permanent FI Delay Time, FI Delay Time is
initialized and returned to the first permanent FI occurrence condition.
Clear Condition
It
is
cleared
by
Target
reset
button
or
remote
Target
reset
command.
Alternatively, it can be cleared automatically depending on the FI auto reset
setting. Please refer to “8.1.1.1.(6) FI Auto Reset” for more details on Auto Reset.
A,N
A,N
B,N
B,N
P.C
Permanent
FI Set Time
N.C
0.6s
2s
①
②
FI Occurrence(A,N)
Fault Current(A,B,C,N)
15s
③
FI Occurrence(B)
④
⑤
Permanent FI Occurrence
<Figure 8-2> Permanent FI Detection (2)
Ÿ
Fault is experienced in normal status and FI is occurred at dead voltage time
(①②③④ time : additional occurred phase update)
Ÿ
Fault current size is the max. RMS value which is from the fault detect to the
dead voltage. Event time is handled by the dead voltage detect time
※. When the "Fault AI Ev" setting is "1Shot", fault current Event is occurred
only at the first fault.
Ÿ
Additional FI is not occurred when fault has detected in the same phase
during Sequence operation. When fault is detected in other phase during
Sequence, FI is occurred in the detected phase(③)
Ÿ
After Sequence is finished (permanent fault Delay time), send the FI occurred
event and fault current to the main device(⑤)
Ÿ
This is cleared by “Target Reset" command, “Permanent FI occurrence” and
“F I occurrence” event clear.
173
Multi-Way Switchgear Controller ETR606
② ‘IV' Type - Temporary FI Detection
It is used for Temporary fault monitoring of
distribution line and operates based
on the following condition.
선 VOLTAGE
로 전 압
P IFI
CK
UP치
PICKPU
선CURRENT
로 전 류
TEMPORARY
순 간
F I S E T FI
T I SET
N G TIME
T IM E
일 시
PERMANET
F I S E FI
T TSET
I N GTIME
T IM E
C LEAR
순TEMPORARY
간 FI
FI
FI SET
일
시 FI
PERMANENT
FI
TEMPORARY
순 간 고 FAULT
장
<Figure 8-3> Temporary FI Detection (1)
Occurrence Condition
When fault current over the setting value flows and then becomes dead line, FI
event is occurred. If it becomes normal current in live line status by reclosing in
source side, after the setting time (Temporary FI Delay Time, 0~600sec variable
Default:2sec) Temporary FI is occurred.
Clear Condition
It
is
cleared
by
Target
reset
button
or
remote
Target
reset
command.
Alternatively, it can be cleared automatically depending on the FI auto reset
setting. Please refer to “8.1.1.1.(6) FI Auto Reset” for more details on Auto Reset.
174
Multi-Way Switchgear Controller ETR606
B,N
A,N
Temporary
FI Set Time
P.C
N.C
0.6s
③
Temporary FI
Occurrence
2s
①
②
FI Occurrence(A,N)
FI Occurrence(B)
Fault Current(A,B,C,N)
<Figure 8-4> Temporary FI Detection (2)
Ÿ
Fault is experienced in normal status and FI is occurred at dead voltage time
(①② : additional occurred phase update)
Ÿ
Fault current size is the max. RMS value which is from the fault detect to the
dead voltage. Event time is handled by the dead voltage detect time
※. If the "Fault AI Ev" setting is "1Shot", Fault current Event is occurred at
first fault only.
Ÿ
Additional FI is not occurred when fault has detected in the same phase
during Sequence operation. When fault is detected in other phase during
Sequence, FI is occurred in the detected phase(②)
Ÿ
After
several
times
of
line
normal
status
(Temporary
FI
Delay
time),
"Temporary fault occurrence" event is sent to the main device (③)
Ÿ
This is cleared by “Target Reset" command and “Temporary FI occurrence“
and “FI occurrence” events are cleared
175
Multi-Way Switchgear Controller ETR606
B. ‘I’ FI Type
Fault Indicator operates depending upon a fault Current and fault duration. If fault
current maintains during ‘Type I delay’ time, FI operates.
FI PICKUP
NORMAL
CURRENT
FI DELAY TIME
CLEAR
FI
FI SET
<Figure 8-5> I type FI Detection (1)
Occurrence Condition
In case of I type for TYPE SELECT, FI is occurred regardless of voltage status,
if fault current higher than FI pickup current continues to flow during setting
time (Type I delay Set Time, 0~600sec variable Default: 0.03sec).
Clear Condition
It
is
cleared
by
Target
reset
button
or
remote
Target
reset
command.
Alternatively, it can be cleared automatically depending on the FI auto reset
setting. Please refer to “8.1.1.1.(6) FI Auto Reset” for more details on Auto Reset.
176
Multi-Way Switchgear Controller ETR606
A,N
P.C
N.C
Type I delay
Set Time
①
FI Occurrence(A,N)
Fault Current(A,B,C,N)
<Figure 8-6> I type FI Detection (2)
Ÿ
If fault current keeps during the setting time(Type I delay Time), FI is
occurred(①).
Ÿ
Fault current size is the max. RMS value during the setting time.
※. If the "Fault AI Ev" setting is "1Shot", Fault current Event is occurred at
first fault only.
Ÿ
This is cleared by “Target Reset" command and “FI occurrence“ events are
cleared.
(4) INRUSH RESTRAINT
ETR606 has inrush restraint function to prevent the malfunction by inrush current
produced at the restoration of load supply. Inrush restraint function setting can
be set separately in phase and ground during the inrush duration time after the
restoration of load supply. During the inrush duration, the device increases the
fault pickup level to prevent it from tripping for inrush current.
Current
Inrush Time
Inrush Duration
Fault Detection Region
Fault Detection Region
Fault Current
Inrush Duration
Fault Pickup Current
(Pickup Current × Multi)
Inrush Current
Restraint Region
Fault Detection Region
(No Fault Detection)
Pickup Current
Inrush Current
Inrush Duration
Time
Supply Restore
<Figure 8-7> Inrush Restraint Operation Characteristics for S/W type
177
Multi-Way Switchgear Controller ETR606
According to setting of “Make use ‘I’”, the condition to decide the restoration of
load supply will be changed. If “YES” is set, the decision is made when the load
current becomes over 0.2% of the rated current. If “NO” is set, the decision is
made when the switch is closed (52A) and live line status.
The settings for the Inrush restraint function consist of 3 sub-menus as shown
below.
[INRUSH RESTRAINT – 1 WAY]
>1.Inrush Duration
2.Pickup Current
3.Others
▲▼Move, ■Select, ●Return
[ LCD Screen ] Inrush Restraint Setting Menu Screen
A. Inrush Duration
Inrush duration time can be set from this menu. Phase and Ground elements are
set separately.
[INRUSH DURATION – 1 WAY]
>Phase :
2.00
Ground:
2.00
Neg Seq':
2.00
[0.00~600.00:0.01s]
▲▼Move, ■Select, ●Return
[ LCD Screen ] Inrush Duration Setting Menu Screen
1) Phase
Range 0.00~600.00 s
Default
2.00
Step
0.01 s
n Set inrush duration time of phase.
n After the restoration of load supply, inrush restraint duration for phase
fault is applied for this set time.
178
Multi-Way Switchgear Controller ETR606
2) Ground
Range 0.00~600.00 s
Default
2.00
Step
0.01 s
n Set inrush duration time of ground.
n After the restoration of load supply, inrush restraint duration for
ground fault is applied for this set time.
3) Neg Seq’
Range 0.00~600.00 s
Default
2.00
Step
0.01 s
n Set inrush duration time of negative sequence.
n After the restoration of load supply, inrush restraint duration for
negative sequence fault is applied for this set time.
B. Inrush Pickup Current
Picup current for Inrush duration can be set from this menu. Phase and Ground
elements are set separately.
[PICKUP CURRENT – 1 WAY]
>Phase-Multi:
Ground-Multi:
Neg Seq'-Multi:
4
4
4
[1~20:1 xMTC]
▲▼Move, ■Select, ●Return
[ LCD Screen ] Inrush Pickup Current Setting Menu Screen
1) Phase-Multi
Range 1~20 xMTC
Default
4 xMTC
Step
1 xMTC
n Set the pickup level for phase fault during inrush duration.
n The setup value is set as the multiplication of phase fault pickup
current in section 8.1.1.1.(2).
179
Multi-Way Switchgear Controller ETR606
2) Ground-Multi
Range 1~20 xMTC
Default
4 xMTC
Step
1 xMTC
n Set the pickup level for gournd fault during inrush duration.
n The setup value is set as the multiplication of ground fault pickup
current in section 8.1.1.1.(2).
3) Neg Seq’-Multi
Range 1~20 xMTC
Default
4 xMTC
Step
1 xMTC
n Set the pickup level for negative sequence fault during inrush duration.
n The setup value is set as the multiplication of negative sequencefault
pickup current in section 8.1.1.1.(2).
C. Others
It is the menu to set the activation factor for Inrush duration.
[INRUSH DURATION – 1 WAY]
>Make Use 'I':
NO
[ NO/YES ]
▲▼Move, ■Select, ●Return
1) Make Use 'I'
Range
NO, YES
Default
NO
Step
-
n Set whether or not to use the current as the decision factor for inrush
restraint function.
n When it is set to no, the inrush duration becomes activated if the line
is restored (live line) and the device is in close status(52A).
n When it is set to YES, the inrush duration becomes activated only if
the magnitude of the restored current increases above 2A.
180
Multi-Way Switchgear Controller ETR606
(5) DIRECTION
Place the curser on “DIRECTION” in FAULT INDICATION menu, press [ENT]
button to move into this menu.
[DIRECTION – 1 WAY(SW)]
>1.Phase
2.Ground
3.Neg Seq'
▲▼Move, ■Select, ●Return
[ LCD Screen ] Direction Setting Menu Screen
The Directional Controls provide fault indication(applied when S/W type) and
overcurrent protection(applied when C/B type) in the direction of power flow.
The directional controls are necessary for the fault indication and protection of
multiple feeders, when it has the necessity of finding faults in different
directions. The directional controls are comprised of phase, ground, negative
sequence fault indication and overcurrent elements. The directional control
function is set separately for phase and ground directional element. When a fault
occurs, the fault indication and overcurrent elements are operated only when the
fault direction is the same as the set type.
If directional controls are selected, it will determine whether current flow in each
phase is in forward or reverse direction, as determined by the connection of the
phase CTs, selected Maximum Torque Angle (MTA), voltage and current phasors.
To increase security of all directional controls, add one power frequency cycle of
intentional delay to prevent incorrect operation.
181
Multi-Way Switchgear Controller ETR606
A. Phase Direction
It moves to this menu if [ENT] key is pressed after locating cursor in “1.
PHASE" in 'DIRECTION' menu. At this menu, direction detection settings of phase
fault are set and has menu as shown below.
[PHASE – 1 WAY(SW)]
>Type:
NONE
M.T.A(V1):
60
M.P.V:
0.30
Block OC:
YES
[NONE/FOR/REV]
▲▼Move, ■Select, ●Return
[ LCD Screen ] Phase Direction Setting Menu Screen
The direction distinction of phase fault current use positive sequence voltage(V1)
and positive sequence current(I1) of symmetry, and operation are as following.
Ÿ
Distinguish in Forward if I1 phase about V1 is within ±90° according M.T.A
basis and if not in Reverse.
Ÿ
When fault is occurred in Voltage Metering nearby, V1 value can be lost. In
this case, use saved V1 and perform directional detection.
Ÿ
To operate in direction, V1 detected in fault status shall be bigger than min.
polarizing voltage(M.P.V). If V1 is smaller than this setting value then it does
not detect direction even when fault current is over pickup current.
182
Multi-Way Switchgear Controller ETR606
<Figure 8-8> Phase Directional Detection Element Characteristic
1) Type
Range NONE, FORWARD, REVERSE
Default
Step
NONE
-
n Set phase fault direction type. Fault indication (applied when S/W type)
and phase overcurrent protection (applied when C/B type) are operated
only when the same phase fault direction as this setting occurs.
n NONE : Regardless of phase direction, phase fault indication or phase
overcurrent is operated by normal phase current(Ia,Ib,Ic).
n FORWARD : Phase fault indication or phase overcurrent is operated
when forward phase fault. In case of reverse phase fault, phase fault
indication or phase overcurrent operation is blocked.
n REVERSE : Phase fault indication or phase overcurrent is operated
when reverse phase fault. In case of forward phase fault, phase fault
indication or phase overcurrent operation is blocked.
183
Multi-Way Switchgear Controller ETR606
2) M.T.A(V1)
Range
0~359° Lag
Default
60° Lag
Step
1° Lag
n Set Maximum Torque Angle of positive sequence current (I1) about
positive sequence voltage (V1), when detects phase fault.
n V1 as standard, set in clock wise direction.
3) M.P.V
Range
0(OFF), 0.10~0.80 xVT
Default
0.30 xVT
Step
0.01 xVT
n Set Minimum Polarizing Voltage about positive sequence voltage(V1) to
distinguish direction.
n This setting is applied with multiple of rated voltage. If the set value
is 0.30xVT and the rated voltage is 13.2kV, the Minimum Polarizing
Voltage is 3.96kV (= 13.2kV * 0.30).
n When V1 detected is below set value, direction is not determined.
n Voltage is not applied in determination of direction when set as
0(OFF).
4) Block OC
Range
NO, YES
Default
NO
Step
-
n Set whether to block the operation of the fault indication (applied
when S/W type) or overcurrent protection (applied when C/B type) if
the fault direction cannot be determined because the positive sequence
voltage (V1) is less than the M.P.V setting.
n NO : If the fault direction cannot be determined, phase fault indication
or phase overcurrent protection is unconditionally operated regardless
of the set direction type.
n YES : If the fault direction cannot be determined, the operation of
phase fault indication or phase overcurrent protection is blocked.
However, if the direction type is set to NONE, it operates normally
since it does not consider fault direction to operate.
184
Multi-Way Switchgear Controller ETR606
B. Ground Direction
It moves to this menu if [ENT] key is pressed after locating cursor in “2.
GROUND" in 'DIRECTION' menu. At this menu, direction detection settings of
ground fault are set and has menu as shown below.
[GROUND – 1 WAY(SW)]
>Type:
NONE
M.T.A(-V0):
60
M.P.V:
0.30
Block OC:
YES
[NONE/FOR/REV]
▲▼Move, ■Select, ●Return
[ LCD Screen ] Ground Direction Setting Menu Screen
The direction distinction of ground fault current use zero sequence voltage(V0)
and zero sequence current(I0) of symmetry, and operation are as following.
Ÿ
IF phase angle of I0 about –V0 is within ±90° based on Max. Torque
Angle(M.T.A) is Forward, if not is Reverse.
Ÿ
To operates in direction, 3V0 detected in fault status shall be bigger than min.
polarizing voltage(M.P.V). If 3V0 is smaller than each element setting does not
detect direction, even fault current is over pickup current setting value.
185
Multi-Way Switchgear Controller ETR606
<Figure 8-9> Ground Directional Detection Element Characteristic
1) Type
Range NONE, FORWARD, REVERSE
Default
Step
NONE
-
n Set ground fault direction type. Fault indication (applied when S/W
type) and overcurrent protection (applied when C/B type) are operated
only when the same ground fault direction as this setting occurs.
n NONE : Regardless of ground direction, ground fault indication or
ground overcurrent is operated by ground current(Ig).
n FORWARD : Ground fault indication or ground overcurrent is operated
when forward gournd fault. In case of reverse ground fault, ground
fault indication or ground overcurrent operation is blocked.
n REVERSE : Ground fault indication or ground overcurrent is operated
when reverse ground fault. In case of forward ground fault, ground
fault indication or ground overcurrent operation is blocked.
186
Multi-Way Switchgear Controller ETR606
2) M.T.A(-V0)
Range
0~359° Lag
Default
60° Lag
Step
1° Lag
n Set Maximum Torque Angle of zero sequence current (I0) about zero
sequence voltage (-V0), when detects ground fault.
n I0 as standard, set in clock wise direction.
3) M.P.V
Range
0(OFF), 0.10~0.80 xVT
Default
0.30 xVT
Step
0.01 xVT
n Set Minimum Polarizing Voltage about zero sequence voltage(3V0) to
distinguish direction.
n This setting is applied with multiple of rated voltage. If the set value
is 0.30xVT and the rated voltage is 13.2kV, the Minimum Polarizing
Voltage is 3.96kV (= 13.2kV * 0.30).
n When 3V0 detected is below set value, direction is not determined.
n Voltage is not applied in determination of direction when set as
0(OFF).
4) Block OC
Range
NO, YES
Default
NO
Step
-
n Set whether to block the operation of the fault indication (applied
when S/W type) or overcurrent protection (applied when C/B type) if
the fault direction cannot be determined because the zero sequence
voltage (3V0) is less than the M.P.V setting.
n NO : If the fault direction cannot be determined, ground fault indication
or ground overcurrent protection is unconditionally operated regardless
of the set direction type.
n YES : If the fault direction cannot be determined, the operation of
ground fault indication or ground overcurrent protection is blocked.
However, if the direction type is set to NONE, it operates normally
since it does not consider fault direction to operate.
187
Multi-Way Switchgear Controller ETR606
C. Negative Sequence Direction
It moves to this menu if [ENT] key is pressed after locating cursor in “3. NEG
SEQ’" in 'DIRECTION' menu. At this menu, direction detection settings of
negative sequence fault are set and has menu as shown below.
[GROUND – 1 WAY(SW)]
>Type:
NONE
M.T.A(-V2):
60
M.P.V:
0.30
Block OC:
YES
[NONE/FOR/REV]
▲▼Move, ■Select, ●Return
[ LCD Screen ] Ground Direction Setting Menu Screen
The
direction
distinction
sequence voltage(V2)
of
negative
sequence
and negative sequence
fault
current
current(I2)
use
negative
of symmetry,
and
operation are as following.
Ÿ
IF phase angle of I2 about –V2 is within ±90° based on Max. Torque
Angle(M.T.A) is Forward, if not is Reverse.
Ÿ
To operates in direction, V2 detected in fault status shall be bigger than min.
polarizing voltage(M.P.V). If V2 is smaller than each element setting does not
detect direction, even fault current is over pickup current setting value.
188
Multi-Way Switchgear Controller ETR606
Polarizing Referance
Voltage:
-V2
Typical Fault Angle
ro
Ze
M.T.A= 60?Lag
I2
ue
rq
To
ne
Li
xim
Ma
um
e
Lin
ue
q
r
To
FO
D
R
O
RW
R
VE
RE
SE
V2
<Figure 8-10> Negative Sequence Directional Detection Element Characteristic
1) Type
Range NONE, FORWARD, REVERSE
Default
Step
NONE
-
n Set negative sequence fault direction type. Fault indication (applied
when S/W type) and overcurrent protection (applied when C/B type)
are operated only when the same negative sequence fault direction as
this setting occurs.
n NONE : Regardless of ground direction, negative sequence fault
indication or negative sequence overcurrent is operated by negative
sequence current(I2).
n FORWARD : Negative sequence fault indication or negative sequence
overcurrent is operated when forward negative sequence fault. In case
of reverse negative sequence fault, negative sequence fault indication
or negative sequence overcurrent operation is blocked.
n REVERSE : Negative sequence fault indication or negative sequence
overcurrent is operated when reverse negative sequence fault. In case
of forward negative sequence fault, negative sequence fault indication
or negative sequence overcurrent operation is blocked.
189
Multi-Way Switchgear Controller ETR606
2) M.T.A(-V2)
Range
0~359° Lag
Default
60° Lag
Step
1° Lag
n Set Maximum Torque Angle of negative sequence current (I2) about
negative sequence voltage (-V2), when detects ground fault.
n I2 as standard, set in clock wise direction.
3) M.P.V
Range
0(OFF), 0.10~0.80 xVT
Default
0.30 xVT
Step
0.01 xVT
n Set Minimum Polarizing Voltage about negative sequence voltage(V2)
to distinguish direction.
n This setting is applied with multiple of rated voltage. If the set value
is 0.30xVT and the rated voltage is 13.2kV, the Minimum Polarizing
Voltage is 3.96kV (= 13.2kV * 0.30).
n When V2 detected is below set value, direction is not determined.
n Voltage is not applied in determination of direction when set as
0(OFF).
4) Block OC
Range
NO, YES
Default
NO
Step
-
n Set whether to block the operation of the fault indication (applied
when S/W type) or overcurrent protection (applied when C/B type) if
the
fault
direction
cannot
be
determined
because
the
negative
sequence voltage (V2) is less than the M.P.V setting.
n NO : If the fault direction cannot be determined, negative sequence
fault
indication
or
negative
sequence
overcurrent
protection
is
unconditionally operated regardless of the set direction type.
n YES : If the fault direction cannot be determined, the operation of
negative sequence fault indication or negative sequence overcurrent
protection is blocked. However, if the direction type is set to NONE, it
operates normally since it does not consider fault direction to operate.
190
Multi-Way Switchgear Controller ETR606
(6) FI AUTO RESET
ETR606 has a function to automatically reset fault indicator target (front panel
lamp, communication binary input(BI) points, etc.) after detecting fault current and
when line is restored normally. It moves to this menu if [ENT] key is pressed
after locating cursor in "6. FI Auto Reset" in 'FAULT INDICATION' menu to set
this function. The configuration is as below;
[FI AUTO RESET – 1 WAY(SW)]
>Reset Mode:
OFF
Reset Time:
10.00
[ OFF/TEMP/PERM/ALL ]
▲▼Move, ■Select, ●Return
[ LCD Screen ] FI Auto Reset Setting Menu Screen
1) Reset Mode
Range OFF, TEMP, PERM, ALL
Default
Step
OFF
-
n It configures if FI Auto Reset will be used or no.
n OFF : FI Auto Reset is not used.
n TEMP : Auto Reset is applied when Temporary fault is detected on
‘IV’ FI Type.
n PERM : Auto Reset is applied when Permanent fault is detected on
‘IV’ FI Type.
n ALL : Auto Reset is applied when all the types of fault current are
detected on ‘IV’ FI Type and ‘I’ FI Type.
2) Reset Time
Range
0.01~600.00s
Default
10.00s
Step
0.01s
n Reset time is applied about FI Auto Reset.
n After voltage comes back to live line, when the setting value is
maintained during setting time, FI will be reset automatically.
191
Multi-Way Switchgear Controller ETR606
8.1.1.2. MONITORING
Place the curser on “MONITERING” in Primary/Alternate menu, press [ENT]
button to move into this menu. The functions to monitor the distribution line and
the device body status can be set from this menu.
[MONITORING – 1 WAY(SW)]
>1.Live Line
2.Phase Difference
3.Open Phase
4.Operation Count
5.Contact Wear
▲▼Move, ■Select, ●Return
[ LCD Screen ] Monitoring Setting Menu Screen
(1) LIVE LINE
Place the cursor on “LIVE LINE” in MONITORING menu, press [ENT] button to
move into this menu.
ETR606 has the line detection element for each way. If one phase voltage among
three phase maintains over live detect level during a constant time, live line is
detected. Live line detection setting item is same as below.
[LIVE LINE – 1 WAY(SW)]
>Live Line Lv:
0.30
Live Line TD:
4.00
[ 0.10~1.40:0.01 xVT]
▲▼Move, ■Select, ●Return
[ LCD Screen ] Live Line Setting Menu Screen
1) Live Line Lv
192
Range
0.10~1.40 xVT
Default
0.30 xVT
Step
0.01 xVT
Multi-Way Switchgear Controller ETR606
n Set the live line level.
n This setting is applied with multiple of rated voltage. If the set value
is 0.30xVT and the phase rated voltage is 13.2kV, the live line level
is 3.96kV (= 13.2kV * 0.30).
2) Live Line TD
Range
0.00~600.00 s
Default
4.00 s
Step
0.01 s
n Set the delay time of live detect element.
(2) PHASE DIFFERENCE
Place the curser on “PHASE DIFFERENCE” in MONITORING menu, press [ENT]
button to move into this menu.
The ETR606 provides a phase difference element. For each circuit being in open
state, the synchronization is determined to be inconsistent if the difference in
voltage magnitude and angle is over the set value compared to the reference
circuit. In this case, a DIFFP#T (Phase Different Timeout, #: circuit number)
event is generated. In the PLC configuration, manual close can be blocked by
local or remote control in case of synchronization inconsistency (Manual close is
blocked when default is not matched with synchronization). The reference circuit
should be in close and live line status to detect the phase difference. If there
are several circuits in the corresponding status, then the circuit close to the
circuit no.1 is considered as the reference circuit. But, if there is no circuit in
the corresponding status, then the circuit no.1 is considered as the reference
circuit. Phase difference for reference circuit is not detected.
[PHASE DIFFERENCE – 1 WAY]
>Function:
DISABLE
Dead Line Lv:
0.50
Live Line Lv:
0.80
Max Volt Diff:
0.10
Max Angle Diff:
10
Check Phase:
ALL
Time Delay
1.00
[ DISABLE/ENABLE]
▲▼Move, ■Select, ●Return
[ LCD Screen ] Phase Difference Setting Menu Screen
193
Multi-Way Switchgear Controller ETR606
1) Function
Range
DISABLE, ENABLE
Default
DISABLE
Step
-
n It decides whether to use Phase difference element.
2) Dead Line Lv
Range
0.10~1.40 xVT
Default
0.50
Step
0.01 xVT
n Enter the dead line maximum voltage for phase difference.
n This setting is applied with multiple of rated voltage.
n Used to Prevent the phase difference element for voltage below this
level.
3) Live Line Lv
Range
0.10~1.40 xVT
Default
0.80
Step
0.01 xVT
n Enter the live line minimum voltage for phase difference element.
n This setting is applied with multiple of rated voltage.
n Used to activate the phase difference element for voltage over this
level.
n Phase difference is performed when both of the phase voltages of the
detection and reference circuits are greater than or equal to this
setting value.
4) Max Volt Diff
Range
0.10~1.40 xVT
Default
0.10
Step
0.01 xVT
n Enter the maximum voltage difference.
n This setting is applied with multiple of rated voltage.
n A voltage magnitude differential of the two input voltages below this
value is within the permissible limit for phase difference element.
194
Multi-Way Switchgear Controller ETR606
5) Max Angle Diff
Range
1~100 deg
Default
10
Step
1 deg
n Enter the maximum angle difference of the phase difference element.
n An angular differential between the voltage angles below this value is
within the permissible limit for phase difference element.
6) Check Phase
Range
ALL, A, B, C
Default
ALL
Step
-
n Select the phase to detect the phase difference.
n ALL : All of the phases of the detection and reference circuits are
analyzed and if none of them matches, then the phase difference is
detected.
n A/B/C : Selected phases of the detection and reference circuits are
analyzed and phase difference is detected only for that phase.
7) Time Delay
Range
0.00~600.00s
Default
1.00
Step
0.01s
n Set delay time for phase difference element.
195
Multi-Way Switchgear Controller ETR606
(3) OPEN PHASE
Place the cursor on “OPEN PHASE” in MONITORING menu, press [ENT] button
to move into this menu.
This function determines phase as open phase when one or two phase voltages
are more than Off Level and determines as normal if that all three phase
voltages are higher than On Level. Dead line normal condition does not indicate
open phase.
The setting items of OPEN PHASE element are same as below.
[OPEN PHASE – 1 WAY(SW)]
>Function:
DISABLE
On Level:
0.80
Off Level:
0.50
Time Delay:
4.00
[ DISABLE/ENABLE]
▲▼Move, ■Select, ●Return
[ LCD Screen ] Open Phase Setting Menu Screen
1) Function
Range
DISABLE, ENABLE
Default
DISABLE
Step
-
n Set whether it activates open phase function to detect open phase or
not.
2) On Level
Range
0.10~1.40 xVT
Default
0.80
Step
0.01 xVT
n Set normal voltage level.
n This setting is applied with multiple of rated voltage.
3) Off Level
Range
0.10~1.40 xVT
Default
0.50
Step
0.01 xVT
n Set voltage level to detect loss of phase.
196
Multi-Way Switchgear Controller ETR606
n This setting is applied with multiple of rated voltage.
4) Time Delay
Range
0.00~600.00s
Default
4.00
Step
0.01s
n Set delay time to detect open phase.
(4) OPERATION COUNT
Place the cursor on “OPERATION COUNT” in MONITORING menu, press [ENT]
button to move into this menu.
ETR606 registers and monitors the operation count for each circuit when an
open operation occurs. Operation count monitoring element is set from this menu.
[OPERATION COUNT – 1 WAY]
>Function:
DISABLE
Alarm Count:
10000
Reset Count:
0
[ DISABLE/ENABLE ]
▲▼Move, ■Select, ●Return
[ LCD Screen ] Operation Count Monitoring Setting Menu Screen
1) Function
Range
DISABLE, ENABLE
Default
DISABLE
Step
-
n Select whether to use switchgear’s operation count monitoring.
n If function is activated and operation counter is over “Alarm Count”,
Logic bit DIGOPRC(Diagnostic Operation Count) is set(‘1’). Logic bit
can be used for Output or Alarm through Interface software.
197
Multi-Way Switchgear Controller ETR606
2) Alarm Count
Range
1~20000
Default
10000
Step
1
n Set a number to alarm when switchgear’s controller operation number
meets this set.
3) Reset Count
Range
0~10000
Default
0
Step
1
n Set
the
reset
value
of
the
operation
count
of
switchgear’s
corresponding circuit.
n The reset value is applied to the corresponding circuit after being
reset.
n Operation count can be reset from the “MAIN MENU (CIRCUIT) /
MAINTENANCE / DATA RESET / OPERATION COUNT” menu.
n Registered opeartion count can be checked from the “MAIN MENU
(CIRCUIT) / MAINTENANCE / COUNT / OPERATION” menu.
(5) CONTACT WEAR
Place the cursor on “CONTACT WEAR” in MONITORING menu, press [ENT]
button to move into this menu.
ETR606 registers and monitors the contact wear during open operation for each
circuit. Contact wear monitoring element is set from this menu.
[CONTACT WEAR – 1 WAY(SW)]
>Function:
DISABLE
Alarm Pickup:
20.0
Time Delay:
0.01
Interrupt I1:
1.00
Interrpt Ct1:
10000
Interrupt I2:
20.0
Interrpt Ct2:
16
A Wear Set:
100.00
B Wear Set:
100.00
C Wear Set:
100.00
[ DISABLE/ENABLE ]
▲▼Move, ■Select, ●Return
[ LCD Screen ] Contact Wear Monitoring Setting Menu Screen
198
Multi-Way Switchgear Controller ETR606
1) Function
Range
DISABLE, ENABLE
Default
DISABLE
Step
-
n Select whether to use switchgear’s contact wear monitoring.
2) Alarm Pickup
Range
0.0~50.0%
Default
20.0%
Step
0.1%
n Set a pickup value of contact wear alarm.
n The logic bit DIGCTW (Diagnostic Contact Wear) is set to (‘1’) and an
alarm is generated if the contact wear value of the corresponding
circuit is less than this set value.
3) Time Delay
Range
0.00~1.00 s
Default
0.01 s
Step
0.01 s
n Set the delay time for calculating contact wear.
n When the trip signal is generated, contact wear starts calculating after
this setting time.
4) Interrupt I1
Range
1.00~600.00 kA
Default
1 kA
Step
0.01 kA
n To set operation number of the curve for interruption current to
operation number at the point 1(maximum operation number) of the
corresponding circuit’s tank.
5) Interrupt Ct1
Range
1~60000
Default
10000
Step
199
1
Multi-Way Switchgear Controller ETR606
n To set interruption current of the curve for interruption current to
operation number at the point 1(maximum operation number) of the
corresponding circuit’s tank.
6) Interrupt I2
Range
1.00~600.00 kA
Default
20 kA
Step
0.01 kA
n To set operation number of the curve for interruption current to
operation number at the point 2(minimum operation number) of the
corresponding circuit’s tank
※. NOTE ) This setting is not supported for switch(S/W) type, and is
displayed only for the circuit breaker(C/B) type.
7) Interrupt Ct2
Range
1~60000
Default
16
Step
1
n To set interruption current of the curve for interruption current to
operation number at the point 2(minimum operation number) of the
corresponding circuit’s tank.
※. NOTE ) This setting is not supported for switch(S/W) type, and is
displayed only for the circuit breaker(C/B) type.
8) A Wear Set
Range
0.00 ~ 100.00 %
Default
100.00%
Step
0.01%
n It is to set the phase A contact wear value of the corresponding
circuit in ETR606. Set value is available after Contact Wear Reset.
9) B Wear Set
Range
0.00 ~ 100.00 %
Default
100.00%
Step
0.01%
n It is to set the phase B contact wear value of the corresponding
circuit in ETR606. Set value is available after Contact Wear Reset.
200
Multi-Way Switchgear Controller ETR606
10) C Wear Set
Range
0.00 ~ 100.00 %
Default
100.00%
Step
0.01%
n It is to set the phase A contact wear value of the corresponding
circuit in ETR606. Set value is available after Contact Wear Reset.
※. NOTE ) Contact wear value can be reset from the “MAIN MENU
(CIRCUIT) / MAINTENANCE / DATA RESET / CONTACT WEAR” menu.
Registered contact wear value can be checked from the “MAIN MENU
(CIRCUIT) / MAINTENANCE / CONTACT WEAR” menu.
201
Multi-Way Switchgear Controller ETR606
8.1.1.3. AUTO SECTION
Place the cursor on “AUTO SECTION” in GROUP SETTINGS menu, press [ENT]
button to move into this menu. Auto section function can be set from this menu.
ETR606 provides auto section function in switch(S/W) type. The auto section is a
function that automatically opens when it detects dead voltage by the tripping of
the back-up protection device after experiencing a fault current, and separates
the fault section from the system.
Settings related to Auto Section is as follows;
[AUTO SECTION – 1 WAY(SW)]
>Function
:
DISABLE
AutoRestore:
DISABLE
SEC Open TD:
3.00
AR WaitTime:
17.00
AR Close TD:
2.00
Lockout TD:
2.00
L.O AutoRst:
ON
L.O RstTime:
2.00
[ DISABLE/ENABLE]
▲▼Move, ■Select, ●Return
[ LCD Screen ] Auto Section Setting Menu Screen
1) Function
Range
DISABLE, ENABLE
Default
DISABLE
Step
-
n Setting to activate or deactivate the auto section function.
2) Auto Restore
Range
DISABLE, ENABLE
Default
DISABLE
Step
-
n Setting to activate or deactivate the Auto Restoring function when
voltage returns to normal after auto section opening operation.
n If this setting is set to “DISABLE”, it locks out the auto section
sequence after the open operation.
202
Multi-Way Switchgear Controller ETR606
3) SEC Open TD
Range
0.00~600.00s
Default
3.00s
Step
0.01s
n Time delay for the auto section to open.
n ETR606 automatically opens if the dead voltage is maintained for this
set time after experiencing a fault current.
4) AR WaitTime
Range
0.01~600.00s
Default
17.00s
Step
0.01s
n This is waiting time setting for auto restoration after auto section
opening operation.
n After opening, it is automatically closed when the line returns to
normal before this set time.
n The auto section sequence operation is locked out if the line is not
restored even after this setting time has elapsed.
n However, this setting is applied only when the ‘Auto Restore’ setting
is set to “ENABLE”.
5) AR Close TD
Range
0.01~600.00s
Default
2.00s
Step
0.01s
n Time delay for the auto section to reclose.
n After auto section opening operation, ETR606 automatically closes if
the line returns to live voltage before AR WaitTime and maintains it
for this set time.
n However, this setting is applied only when the ‘Auto Restore’ setting
is set to “ENABLE”.
6) Lockout TD
203
Range
0.00~600.00s
Default
2.00s
Step
0.01s
Multi-Way Switchgear Controller ETR606
n Set the lockout time for auto section sequence operation.
n The auto section lockout state is activated if the line normal state is
maintained for this set time or auto section open operation is
performed again after auto close.
n Auto section does not operate in lockout state.
n The lockout state can be reset locally by using the [TARGET RESET]
button from the device panel or remotely by using the Binary Output
(BO) point.
n Also, it can be automatically reset according to the L.O AutoRst and
L.O RstTime settings.
7) L.O AutoRst
Range
OFF, ON
Default
ON
Step
-
n This is the setting whether to automatically reset after lockout or not.
8) L.O RstTime
Range
0.00~600.00s
Default
2.00s
Step
0.01s
n Set the delay time to reset the automatic lockout.
n If the ETR606 is closed and in lockout state, the lockout state will be
automatically reset if the normal live voltage is maintained for this set
time.
n However, this setting is applied only when the ‘L.O Auto Rst’ setting
is set to “ON”.
204
Multi-Way Switchgear Controller ETR606
Voltage
Pickup Level
Current
SEC Open
Time Delay
CLEAR
Auto Restoration
Wait Time
CLEAR
Auto Restoration
Close Time Delay
Close Status
Lockout
Time Delay
LOCKOUT
RESET
Auto Section
Lockout
<Figure 8-11> Auto Section Function Characteristic
8.1.1.4. SAVE SETTINGS
From this menu, you can save the changed setting values of the GROUP SETTINGS
menu for Switch(S/W) type. The procedure for storing the set value is described
in “6.7. Setting Save”.
205
Multi-Way Switchgear Controller ETR606
8.1.2. Group Settings for Circuit Breacker(C/B) type
The C/B type menus are divided into 2 groups, both Primary and Alternate
settings have these same submenus. Each group setting has “Protection” and
“Monitoring” setting menu, and Monitoring menu is the same as S/W type.
[PRIMARY – 2 WAY(CB)]
>1.Protection
2.Monitoring
*.Save Settings
▲▼Move, ■Select, ●Return
[ LCD Screen ] Group Setting Menu Screen for C/B type
Caution : Changed set valued must be saved to be applied. When escaping
from "*. SAVE SETTINGS" menu or moving to high menu, changed
set value is saved by 'Changed set value saved message'.
8.1.2.1. PROTECTION
Place the cursor on “Protection” in Primary/Alternate setting menu, press [ENT]
button to move into this menu.
This menu sets the protection elements that operate when the CB type is set.
[PROTECTION – 2 WAY(CB)]
>1.Auto Reclosing
2.51P:TIME OC-PHA
3.51G:TIME OC-GND
4.51Q:TIME OC-NEQ
5.50P:INST OC-PHA
6.50G:INST OC-GND
7.50Q:INST OC-NEQ
8.Inrush Restraint
9.Direction
10.Voltage
11.Frequency
12.User Curve
13.FI Auto Reset
▲▼Move, ■Select, ●Return
[ LCD Screen ] Protection Setting Menu Screen
206
Multi-Way Switchgear Controller ETR606
(1) AUTO RECLOSING
ETR306 has Auto Reclosing(79) function that electrical power system can be
rapidly tripped when line fault is occurred, circuit breaker can be reclosed after
a given interval (reclosing interval). In case of temporary fault caused by
momentary contact of extraneous substance, lightning or loss of insulation and so
on, range of fault and outage time can be minimized by this reclosing function.
After a fault has occurred, the Reclose element closes the recloser when the
programmed reclose interval time expires. The number of operation lockout
setting is programmed one to four, and each reclose shot has its own separate
reclose interval timer.
If the fault is permanent and the circui breaker continues to trip and reclose, the
Reclose element will continue to increment the operating counter. If this
continues to the maximum number of the operating lockout programmed in the
Auto Reclosing element, the reclose logic lockouts. At this moment, if make close
operation remotely or locally, Lockout is released and fault detecting is activated.
Also, if the fault is temporary, the Lockout sequence of the circuit breaker is
Reset by Reset logic.
Auto reclosing sequence operation status is displayed on the LEDs of ‘79
Reset(79RS)’, ‘79 Cycle(79CY)’ and ‘79 Lockout’ as follows.
<Figure 8-12> Auto Reclosing Seqence Operation Characteristic
207
Multi-Way Switchgear Controller ETR606
LOCKOUT
Following cases are occurred to lockout. Due to the fact that auto reclosing does
not function in lockout status, circuit breaker should be closed to control locally
or remotely.
Ÿ
Fault continues to flow, circuit breaker operates to trip as much as preset
operation number. (Permanent Fault)
Ÿ
Circuit breaker operates manually to open
Ÿ
Circuit breaker operates to trip fault current is higher than inrush pickup
current during inrush duration.
Ÿ
Circuit breaker operates to fault trip by protection elements(voltage(27, 59)
and frequency(81U, 81O), etc.) excluding overcurrent.
Ÿ
Auto reclosing function is disabled, overcurrent protection trip operates.
Following “<Figure 8-13> Lockout Sequence Operation” describes a typical
protection sequence situation that the fourth trip for overcurrent protection
operates after than lockouts when total number of operation is set to four.
(1) 1st Trip - 1st TCC
(2) 1st Reclose Interval Time
(3) 2nd Trip - 2nd TCC
(4) 2nd Reclose Interval Time
(5) 3rd Trip - 3rd TCC
(6) 3rd Reclose Interval Time
(7) 4th Trip - 4th TCC
<Figure 8-13> Lockout Sequence Operation
At the lockout status, if make close operation remotely or locally, Lockout is
released and auto recoling operation is activated after lockout reset time.
208
Multi-Way Switchgear Controller ETR606
RESET
RESET is displayed on back to normal status, following cases are occurred to
reset.
Ÿ
Lockout ➜ Reset : lockout reset time elapses after circuit breaker manually
or remotely operates to trip.
Ÿ
Cycle ➜ Reset : auto reset time elapses after returning to normal status from
reclosing sequence for temporary fault.
Following
“<Figure
8-14>
Reset
Sequence
Operation”
describes
a
typical
temporary fault protection sequence situation that the second trip operates and
after than it comes back to reset status caused by the fault disappears when
total number of operation is set to four.
(1) 1st Trip - 1st TCC
(2) 1st Reclose Interval Time
(3) 2nd Trip - 2nd TCC
(4) 2nd Reclose Interval Time
(5) 3rd Trip - 3rd TCC
(6) 3rd Reclose Interval Time
<Figure 8-14> Reset Sequence Operation
If fault occurs again during auto reset time duration, reclosing operation proceeds
to Lockout after remaining operations except count the number of times the
previous operation.
209
Multi-Way Switchgear Controller ETR606
CYCLE
It displays sequence operating. Cycle is activated to trip operation of overcurrent
protection and keeps whenever total trip count reaches to the preset total
number of operation. Cycle performs that the auto reclosing element closes the
circuit breaker when the programmed reclose interval time expires. (only the
Cycle condition occurs when Auto Reclosing function is enabled).
Place the cursor on “AUTO RECLOSING” in PROTECTION menu, press [ENT]
button to move into this menu. At this menu, set reclosing function and its menu
is as shown below;
[AUTO RECLOSING – 2 WAY]
>1.Function
2.Operations
3.Intervals
▲▼Move, ■Select, ●Return
[ LCD Screen ] Auto Reclosing Menu Screen
A. FUNCTION
It sets auto reclosing function is used or not. If the function is disable, general
functions of circuit breaker are applied to CB type for relevant way of
switchgear. If the function is enable, general functions of recloser are applied to
CB type for relevant way of switchgear.
1) Function
Range
ENABLE, DISABLE
Default
ENABLE
Step
-
n Select whether to enable or disable the auto reclosing function.
B. OPERATIONS
This setting is used to change the total number of phase/ground overcurrent
protection trip operation.
1) Lockout
210
Range
1~4
Default
4
Step
4
Multi-Way Switchgear Controller ETR606
n Select the total number of trip operation.
C. INTERVALS
It sets reclose interval for each reclose shot and reset time for auto reclose and
lockout.
1) Reclose 1
Range
0.10~1800.00s
Default
0.60s
Step
0.01s
n This setting is used to change the first reclose interval time between
the first trip operation and the close operation.
2) Reclose 2
Range
1.00~1800.00s
Default
2.00s
Step
0.01s
n This setting is used to change the second reclose interval time
between the second trip operation and the close operation.
3) Reclose 3
Range
1.00~1800.00s
Default
15.00s
Step
0.01s
n This setting is used to change the third reclose interval time between
the third trip operation and the close operation.
4) Reset T(AR)
Range
0.10~ 600.00 sec
Default
30.00s
Step
0.01s
n This setting is used to change auto reclosing reset time.
n After a temporary fault is removed, ‘Reset T(AR)’ time starts, after
then the number of counter for reclose sequence becomes zero.
n If a fault is detected on ‘Reset T(AR)’ time, Reset timer will be reset.
211
Multi-Way Switchgear Controller ETR606
5) Reset T(LO)
Range
0(OFF), 0.10 ~ 600.00 sec
Default
60.00s
Step
0.01s
n This setting is used to change lockout reset time.
n It is to eliminate reclosing sequence is a fault current is detected after
manual closing and to have waiting time for feeder stabilization.
n After setting time, reclosing function is activated.
6) Reclose Wait
Range
OFF, 0.10~600.00sec
Default
60.00
Step
0.01sec
n Reclose signal is output after reclose interval time, when reclosing
operation does not operate due to close power supply problem, it will
set time to maintain recloser signal. If reclosing operation does not
work during this period, it will be directly LOCKOUT even though
reclosing sequence is remained.
(2) Phase Time Delay Overcurrent (51P)
ETR606 has a phase time delay overcurrent element to set based on CT
secondary
current as connected the current inputs. The phase time overcurrent
element provides a time delay versus current for tripping that is used for an
inverse time curve characteristic coordinated with current pickup value, curve
type, time dial, time adder, minimum response time(MRT) and reset method.
This inverse characteristic means that time overcurrent element operates slowly
on small values of current above the pickup value and operates faster when
current
increases
overcurrent
significantly
element
is
above
enabled
in
the
pickup
value.
The
the
Primary,
Alternate
phase
time
settings
and
[PROTECTION] in user interface panel.
Multiple time curves and time dials are available for the phase time delay
overcurrent element to respectively coordinate with other protection elements in
ETR606 and other external devices on the distribution system. US, ANSI/IEEE,
IEC, ESB, USER and non-standard time current curves are included in ETR606.
A User Programmable curve option is also available allowing the user to create
customer time current curves for more enhanced coordination than the standard
212
Multi-Way Switchgear Controller ETR606
curve types.
Two methods of this resetting operation are available, Instantaneous and Linear.
The Instantaneous selection is intended for applications with other relays, such
as most static units, which set the energy capacity directly to zero when the
current falls below the reset threshold. The Linear selection can be used where
the relay must coordinate with electro-mechanical units.
If the system power is restored after circuit breaker operation (manual [CLOSE]
control through relay front panel or SCADA communication) or current flowing in
the line is detected after an outage condition, then the phase time overcurrent
element is prevented from tripping for a period specified by the inrush restraint
function.
The phase time delay overcurrent element setting factors are as follows. It
moves to this menu if [ENT] key is pressed after locating cursor in “51P:TIME
OC-PHA" in Protection menu.
[51P:TIME OC-PHA – 2 WAY]
>Function:
TRIP
Pickup:
500
Curve:
[ US-VI]
Time Dial:
1.00
Time Add.:
0.00
M.R.T:
0.00
Reset Method:
INST
Low Set DT:
OFF
[DIS/TR/TR&AL/AL]
▲▼Move, ■Select, ●Return
[ LCD Screen ] 51P: TIME OC-PHA Menu Screen
1) Function
Range
DISABLE, TRIP, TR&AL, ALARM
Default
TRIP
Step
-
n Set the function of phase time delay overcurrent as enable or disable.
n DISABLE : The feature is not operational.
n TRIP : The feature is operational. When the feature asserts a trip
condition, the device trips.
n ALARM : The feature is operational. When the feature asserts a alarm
condition, the device gives the alarm.
n TR&AL(Trip & Alarm) : The feature is operational. When the feature
asserts a trip and alarm condition, the device trips and gives the alarm.
213
Multi-Way Switchgear Controller ETR606
2) Pickup
Range
5~1600A
Default
500A
Step
1A
n Set the pickup current of phase time delay overcurrent element.
3) Curve
Range
A(101), B(117), ..., DEF-10S (Total 62 curves)
Default
US-VI
Step
-
n Select desired curve type for phase time delay overcurrent element.
Refer to following “[Table 8-1] ETR606's time-current operation
characteristic curve setting range” for applied curve range.
n Refer to “Appendix D. Time Current Curves” for more detail.
n The T-C curves supported by the ETR606 are as follows;
- US
Ÿ
US-NI : US Normally Inverse
Ÿ
US-VI : US Very Inverse
Ÿ
US-EI : US Extremely Inverse
Ÿ
US-STI : US Short Time Inverse
Ÿ
US-STVI : US Short Time Very Inverse
- ANSI /IEEE
Ÿ
IEEE-NI : ANSI/IEEE Normally Inverse
Ÿ
IEEE-VI : ANSI/IEEE Very Inverse
Ÿ
IEEE-EI : ANSI/IEEE Extremely Inverse
- IEC
Ÿ
IEC-NI : IEC Normally Inverse
Ÿ
IEC-VI : IEC Very Inverse
Ÿ
IEC-EI : IEC Extremely Inverse
Ÿ
IEC-STI : IEC Short Time Inverse
Ÿ
IEC-LTI : IEC Long Time Inverse
- ES
Ÿ
ES-NI : KEPCO ESB Normally Inverse
Ÿ
ES-VI : KEPCO ESB Very Inverse
Ÿ
ES-EI : KEPCO ESB Extremely Inverse
Ÿ
ES-LTVI : KEPCO ESB Long Time Very Inverse
- Definite Time : DEF-1s, DEF-10s
- KERI Curve : N1, N2, N3, N4
214
Multi-Way Switchgear Controller ETR606
- User curves : USER-1,USER-2,USER-3,USER-4
- McGraw-Edison : Non Standard Curves 32
- Fuse curves : RI, HR, FR
[Table 8-1] ETR606's time-current operation characteristic curve setting range
Setting
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Curve
A(101)
B(117)
C(133)
D(116)
E(132)
IEC-EI
K(162)
L(107)
Setting
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
Curve
M(118)
N(104)
IEC-NI
P(115)
R(105)
T(161)
V(137)
IEC-VI
Setting
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
Curve
W(138)
Y(120)
Z(134)
1(102)
2(135)
3(140)
4(106)
5(114)
Setting
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
Curve
6(136)
7(152)
8(113)
8*(111)
9(131)
11(141)
13(142)
14(119)
Setting
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
Curve
15(112)
16(139)
18(151)
N1
N2
N3
N4
US-NI
Setting
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
Curve
US -VI
US -EI
ES-NI
ES-VI
USER-1
USER-2
USER-3
USER-4
Setting
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
Curve
DEF-1S
DEF-10S
IEEE-NI
IEEE-VI
IEEE-EI
US-STI
US-STVI
IEC-LTI
Setting
57
58
59
60
61
62
Curve
IEC-STI
ES-LTVI
ES-EI
RI
HR
FR
4) Time Dial
Range
0.01~25.00
Default
Step
1.00
0.01
n Set time dial, multiplying this value to selected T-C curve. Multiplying
this value changes the slope of the curve.
5) Time Add
Range
0.00~600.00s
Default
Step
0.00
0.01s
n Set Time adder to add set value on selected T-C curve.
215
Multi-Way Switchgear Controller ETR606
6) M.R.T
Range
0.00 ~ 10.00 sec
Default
Step
0.00
0.01s
n T-C curve trip operation is faster than trip time, this set value is
added to T-C curve for more delay. This function can be useful for
other protective device and line fuse coordination.
7) Reset Method
Range
INST, LINEAR
Default
Step
INST
-
n In case that a fault current is decreased under pickup level, phase
time delay overcurrent protection is reset.
n INST : After 1 cycle, Reset.
n LINEAR : Reset when the fault value is reached at selected curve’s
RT (Reset characteristic constant) value.
8) Low Set DT
Range
0(OFF), 0.01 ~ 600.00 sec
Default
Step
0(OFF)
0.01 sec
n Low set definite time is used to restrict a trip time to be a definite
time adjacent to a pickup current by T-C curve. When the trip time is
greater than the low set definite time, low set definite time is applied
for operation.
216
Multi-Way Switchgear Controller ETR606
(3) Ground Time Delay Overcurrent (51G)
ETR606 has a ground time delay overcurrent element to set based on CT
secondary
current as connected the current inputs. The ground time overcurrent
element provides a time delay versus current for tripping that is used for an
inverse time curve characteristic coordinated with current pickup value, curve
type, time dial, time adder, minimum response time(MRT) and reset method.
This inverse characteristic means that ground time overcurrent element operates
slowly on small values of current above the pickup value and operates faster
when current increases significantly above the pickup value. The ground time
overcurrent
element
is
enabled
in
the
Primary,
Alternate
settings
and
[PROTECTION] and [GROUND] in user interface panel.
Multiple time curves and time dials are available for the ground time delay
overcurrent element to respectively coordinate with other protection elements in
ETR306 and other external devices on the distribution system. US, ANSI/IEEE,
IEC, ESB,
and non-standard time current curves are included in ETR606. A
User Programmable curve option is also available allowing the user to create
customer ground time current curves for more enhanced coordination than the
standard curve types.
Two methods of this resetting operation are available, Instantaneous and Linear.
The Instantaneous selection is intended for applications with other relays, such
as most static units, which set the energy capacity directly to zero when the
current falls below the reset threshold. The Linear selection can be used where
the relay must coordinate with electro-mechanical units.
If the system power is restored after circuit breaker operation (manual [CLOSE]
control through relay front panel or SCADA communication) or current flowing in
the line is detected after an outage condition, then the ground time overcurrent
element is prevented from tripping for a period specified by the inrush restraint
function.
217
Multi-Way Switchgear Controller ETR606
The ground time delay overcurrent element setting factors are as follows. It
moves to this menu if [ENT] key is pressed after locating cursor in “51G:TIME
OC-GND" in Protection menu.
[51G:TIME OC-GND – 2 WAY]
>Function:
TRIP
Pickup:
250
Curve:
[ US-VI]
Time Dial:
1.00
Time Add.:
0.00
M.R.T:
0.00
Reset Method:
INST
Low Set DT:
OFF
[DIS/TR/TR&AL/AL]
▲▼Move, ■Select, ●Return
[ LCD Screen ] 51G: TIME OC-GND Menu Screen
1) Function
Range
DISABLE, TRIP, TR&AL, ALARM
Default
TRIP
Step
-
n Set the function of ground time delay overcurrent as enable or disable.
n DISABLE : The feature is not operational.
n TRIP : The feature is operational. When the feature asserts a trip
condition, the device trips.
n ALARM : The feature is operational. When the feature asserts a alarm
condition, the device gives the alarm.
n TR&AL(Trip & Alarm) : The feature is operational. When the feature
asserts a trip and alarm condition, the device trips and gives the alarm.
2) Pickup
Range
5~1600A
Default
250A
Step
1A
n Set the pickup current of ground time delay overcurrent element.
3) Curve
Range
A(101), B(117), ..., DEF-10S (Total 62 curves)
Default
US-VI
Step
218
-
Multi-Way Switchgear Controller ETR606
n Select desired curve type for ground time delay overcurrent element.
Refer to following “[Table 8-1] ETR606's time-current operation
characteristic curve setting range” for applied curve range.
n Refer to “Appendix D. Time Current Curves” for more detail.
4) Time Dial
Range
0.01~25.00
Default
Step
1.00
0.01
n Set time dial, multiplying this value to selected T-C curve. Multiplying
this value changes the slope of the curve.
5) Time Add.
Range
0.00~600.00s
Default
Step
0.00
0.01s
n Set Time adder to add set value on selected T-C curve.
6) M.R.T
Range
0.00 ~ 10.00 sec
Default
Step
0.00
0.01s
n T-C curve trip operation is faster than trip time, this set value is
added to T-C curve for more delay. This function can be useful for
other protective device and line fuse coordination.
7) Reset Method
Range
INST, LINEAR
Default
Step
INST
-
n In case that a fault current is decreased under pickup level, ground
time delay overcurrent protection is reset.
n INST : After 1 cycle, Reset.
n LINEAR : Reset when the fault value is reached at selected curve’s
RT (Reset characteristic constant) value.
219
Multi-Way Switchgear Controller ETR606
8) Low Set DT
Range
0(OFF), 0.01 ~ 600.00 sec
Default
Step
0(OFF)
0.01 sec
n Low set definite time is used to restrict a trip time to be a definite
time adjacent to a pickup current by T-C curve. When the trip time is
greater than the low set definite time, low set definite time is applied
for operation.
(4) Negative Sequence Time Delay Overcurrent (51Q)
ETR606 has a negative sequence time delay overcurrent element. The negative
sequence element measures the amount of unbalance current in the system. The
negative sequence overcurrent element can also be used to detect phase to
ground and two phase to ground faults.
The negative sequence time overcurrent element provides a time delay versus
current for tripping that is used for an inverse time curve characteristic
coordinated with current pickup value, curve type, time dial, time adder, minimum
response time(MRT) and reset method.
This inverse characteristic means that time overcurrent element operates slowly
on small values of current above the pickup value and operates faster when
current increases significantly above the pickup value. The negative sequencetime
overcurrent
element
is
enabled
in
the
Primary,
Alternate
settings
and
[PROTECTION] in user interface panel.
Multiple time curves and time dials are available for the negative sequencetime
delay overcurrent element to respectively coordinate with other protection
elements in ETR606 and other external devices on the distribution system. US,
ANSI/IEEE, IEC, ESB, USER and non-standard time current curves are included
in ETR606. A User Programmable curve option is also available allowing the user
to create customer time current curves for more enhanced coordination than the
standard curve types.
Two methods of this resetting operation are available, Instantaneous and Linear.
The Instantaneous selection is intended for applications with other relays, such
as most static units, which set the energy capacity directly to zero when the
current falls below the reset threshold. The Linear selection can be used where
the relay must coordinate with electro-mechanical units.
220
Multi-Way Switchgear Controller ETR606
If the system power is restored after circuit breaker operation (manual [CLOSE]
control through relay front panel or SCADA communication) or current flowing in
the line is detected after an outage condition, then the negative sequence time
overcurrent element is prevented from tripping for a period specified by the
inrush restraint function.
The negative sequence time delay overcurrent element setting factors are as
follows. It moves to this menu if [ENT] key is pressed after locating cursor in
“51Q:TIME OC-NEQ" in Protection menu.
[51Q:TIME OC-NEQ – 2 WAY]
>Function:
DISABLE
Pickup:
500
Curve:
[ US-VI]
Time Dial:
1.00
Time Add.:
0.00
M.R.T:
0.00
Reset Method:
INST
Low Set DT:
OFF
[DIS/TR/TR&AL/AL]
▲▼Move, ■Select, ●Return
[ LCD Screen ] 51Q: TIME OC-NEQ Menu Screen
1) Function
Range
DISABLE, TRIP, TR&AL, ALARM
Default
TRIP
Step
-
n Set the function of negative sequence time delay overcurrent as enable
or disable.
n DISABLE : The feature is not operational.
n TRIP : The feature is operational. When the feature asserts a trip
condition, the device trips.
n ALARM : The feature is operational. When the feature asserts a alarm
condition, the device gives the alarm.
n TR&AL(Trip & Alarm) : The feature is operational. When the feature
asserts a trip and alarm condition, the device trips and gives the alarm.
2) Pickup
221
Multi-Way Switchgear Controller ETR606
Range
5~1600A
Default
500A
Step
1A
n Set the pickup current of negative sequence time delay overcurrent
element.
3) Curve
Range
A(101), B(117), ..., DEF-10S (Total 62 curves)
Default
US-VI
Step
n Select
desired
overcurrent
curve
element.
type
Refer
for
to
negative
following
sequence
“[Table
time
8-1]
delay
ETR606's
time-current operation characteristic curve setting range” for applied
curve range.
n Refer to “Appendix D. Time Current Curves” for more detail.
4) Time Dial
Range
0.01~25.00
Default
Step
1.00
0.01
n Set time dial, multiplying this value to selected T-C curve. Multiplying
this value changes the slope of the curve.
5) Time Add
Range
0.00~600.00s
Default
Step
0.00
0.01s
n Set Time adder to add set value on selected T-C curve.
6) M.R.T
Range
0.00 ~ 10.00 sec
Default
Step
0.00
0.01s
n T-C curve trip operation is faster than trip time, this set value is
added to T-C curve for more delay. This function can be useful for
other protective device and line fuse coordination.
222
Multi-Way Switchgear Controller ETR606
7) Reset Method
Range
INST, LINEAR
Default
Step
INST
-
n In case that a fault current is decreased under pickup level, negative
sequence time delay overcurrent protection is reset.
n INST : After 1 cycle, Reset.
n LINEAR : Reset when the fault value is reached at selected curve’s
RT (Reset characteristic constant) value.
8) Low Set DT
Range
0(OFF), 0.01 ~ 600.00 sec
Default
Step
0(OFF)
0.01 sec
n Low set definite time is used to restrict a trip time to be a definite
time adjacent to a pickup current by T-C curve. When the trip time is
greater than the low set definite time, low set definite time is applied
for operation.
(5) Phase Instantaneous Overcurrent (50P)
The ETR606 has a phase instantaneous overccurent element. This element in the
ETR606, is set based on CT secondary current as connected to the current
inputs. This element provides a definite time delay versus phase high fault
current.
The operating time of this element should be set for equal to or faster than the
phase time delay overcurrent element. This enabled in the Primary, Alternate
settings and [PROTECTION] in user interface panel.
This element is not affected by the inrush restrain function.
The phase instantaneous
overcurrent element setting factors are as follows. It
moves to this menu if [ENT] key is pressed after locating cursor in “50P:INST
OC-PHA" in Protection menu.
223
Multi-Way Switchgear Controller ETR606
[50P:INST OC-PHA – 2 WAY]
>Function:
ENABLE
Pickup:
4000
Time Delay:
0.00
[ DISABLE/ENABLE ]
▲▼Move, ■Select, ●Return
[ LCD Screen ] 50P: INST OC-PHA Menu Screen
1) Function
Range
DISABLE, ENABLE
Default
ENABLE
Step
-
n Set the function of phase instantaneous
overcurrent as enable or
disable.
n DISABLE : Phase instantaneous overcurrent function does not operate.
n ENABLE : Phase instantaneous overcurrent function operates.
2) Pickup
Range
10~20000A
Default
4000A
Step
1A
n Set the pickup current for phase instantaneous overcurrent element.
n This value is the minimum operating current for phase instantaneous
overcurrent element.
3) Time Delay
Range
0.00~600.00 sec
Default
Step
0.00
0.01 sec
n Set time delay of trip operation for phase instantaneous
overcurrent
element. If it is set for 0, trips immediately without delay time.
224
Multi-Way Switchgear Controller ETR606
(6) Ground Instantaneous Overcurrent (50G)
The ETR606 has a ground instantaneous overccurent element. This element in
the ETR606, is set based on CT secondary current as connected to the current
inputs. This element provides a definite time delay versus ground high fault
current.
The operating time of this element should be set for equal to or faster than the
ground time overcurrent elements. This element is enabled in the Primary,
Alternate settings and [PROTECTION] and [GROUND] in user interface panel.
This element is not affected by the inrush restrain function.
The ground instantaneous
overcurrent element setting factors are as follows. It
moves to this menu if [ENT] key is pressed after locating cursor in “50G:INST
OC-GND" in Protection menu.
[50G:INST OC-GND – 2 WAY]
>Function:
ENABLE
Pickup:
4000
Time Delay:
0.00
[ DISABLE/ENABLE ]
▲▼Move, ■Select, ●Return
[ LCD Screen ] 50G: INST OC-GND Menu Screen
1) Function
Range
DISABLE, ENABLE
Default
ENABLE
Step
-
n Set the function of ground instantaneous
overcurrent as enable or
disable.
n DISABLE : Ground instantaneous overcurrent function does not operate.
n ENABLE : Ground instantaneous overcurrent function operates.
2) Pickup
Range
10~20000A
Default
4000A
Step
1A
n Set the pickup current for phase instantaneous overcurrent element.
n This value is the minimum operating current for phase instantaneous
overcurrent element.
225
Multi-Way Switchgear Controller ETR606
3) Time Delay
Range
0.00~600.00 sec
Default
Step
0.00
0.01 sec
n Set time delay of trip operation for phase instantaneous
overcurrent
element. If it is set for 0, trips immediately without delay time.
(7) Negative Sequence Instantaneous Overcurrent (50Q)
The ETR606 has a negative sequence instantaneous overccurent element for
unbalance current in the system. This element in the ETR606, is set based on
CT secondary current as connected to the current inputs. This element provides
a definite time delay versus negative sequence high fault current.
The operating time of this element should be set for equal to or faster than the
negative sequence time delay overcurrent element. This enabled in the Primary,
Alternate settings and [PROTECTION] in user interface panel.
This element is not affected by the inrush restrain function.
The negative sequence instantaneous
overcurrent element setting factors are as
follows. It moves to this menu if [ENT] key is pressed after locating cursor in
“50Q:INST OC-NEQ" in Protection menu.
[50Q:INST OC-NEQ – 2 WAY]
>Function:
DISABLE
Pickup:
4000
Time Delay:
0.00
[ DISABLE/ENABLE ]
▲▼Move, ■Select, ●Return
[ LCD Screen ] 50Q: INST OC-NEQ Menu Screen
1) Function
Range
DISABLE, ENABLE
Default
ENABLE
Step
-
n Set the function of negative sequence instantaneous overcurrent as
enable or disable.
n DISABLE : Negative seq’ instantaneous overcurrent function does not operate.
n ENABLE : Negative sequence instantaneous overcurrent function operates.
226
Multi-Way Switchgear Controller ETR606
2) Pickup
Range
10~20000A
Default
4000A
Step
n Set
the
1A
pickup
current
for
negative
sequence
instantaneous
overcurrent element.
n This value is the minimum operating current for negative sequence
instantaneous overcurrent element.
3) Time Delay
Range
0.00~600.00 sec
Default
Step
0.00
0.01 sec
n Set time delay of trip operation for negative sequence instantaneous
overcurrent element. If it is set for 0, trips immediately without delay
time.
227
Multi-Way Switchgear Controller ETR606
(8) Inrush Restraint
The ETR606 suppresses the time overcurrent operation during the inrush current
restraint period to prevent erroneous operation of the ETR606 due to the inrush
current generated when the switchgear’s circuit breaker does close operation or
the
near-field
distribution
device
does
close
operation
(the
instantaneous
overcurrent element does normal operation). The setting of the Inrush current
restraint function can be set individually for phase, ground and negative sequence
overcurrent.
Current
> Outage Time
50 Pickup Current
R.M.T Time
(Restore Minimum Time)
50
Operation Region
Inrush DurationFault & 50
Operation Region
Trip
Inrush Current 1
Inrush Duration
Fault Pickup Current
51
Operation Region
Inrush Current
Restraint Region
Trip
Inrush Current 2
51 Pickup Current
Inrush Reset Current
Inrush Current 3
Reset Time
Normal Current
Region
Time
Inrush
Current 2
Inrush
Current 3
Without Supply
Inrush Restraint Duration
Oneshot Trip and Lockout
Normal Condition
Reclosing Avaliable
Inrush Restraint Duration
Oneshot Trip and Lockout
Normal Condition
Reclosing Avaliable
Supply Restore
Inrush Restraint Duration OFF
By Reset Current & Time
<Figure 8-15> Inrush Restratint Operation Characteristics
If the black out duration is more than the outage time and the load current
supply is restored, inrush current restraint algorithm is applied. When the
restoration of load supply is occured, in the case of that generated inrush
current is greater than inrush duration fault pickup current as
inrush current 1
of “<Figure 8-15> Inrush Restratint Operation Characteristics”, it’s considered as
228
Multi-Way Switchgear Controller ETR606
fault current, switchgear’s controller does trip operation during inrush duration.
When inrush current is less than inrush duration fault pickup current as inrush
current 2 of “<Figure 8-15> IInrush Restratint Operation Characteristics” After
fault protection operation is suppressed during R.M.T Time(Restore Minimu
Time), switchgear’s controller does trip operation after inrush duration.
However, inrush duration is removed if inrush current is less than reset current
before R.M.T Time (Restore Minimum Time) as inrush current 3 of “<Figure
8-15> IInrush Restratint Operation Characteristics”.
If the fault current value is more than the inrush fault pick up current, the
switchgear’s circuit breaker does 1st trip operation and goes to lockout status.
NOTE )
According to setting of “Make use ‘I’”, in order to activate inrush current
restraint sectopm the condition to decide the restoration of load supply will
be changed. If “YES” is set, the decision is made when the load current
becomes
over
2A.
If
“NO”
is
set,
the
decision
is
made
when
the
switchgear’s circuit breaker is closed (51A) by local or remote control.
The inrush restraint function setting factors are as follows. It moves to this
menu if [ENT] key is pressed after locating cursor in “INRUSH RESTRAINT” in
Protection menu.
[INRUSH RESTRAINT – 2 WAY]
>1.Function
2.Pickup Current
3.Restore Min. Time
4.Inrush Res’ Reset
5.Phase Curve
6.Ground Curve
7.Neg Seq' Curve
8.Others
▲▼Move, ■Select, ●Return
[ LCD Screen ] Inrush Restraint Menu Screen
229
Multi-Way Switchgear Controller ETR606
A. FUNCTION
It sets auto inrush restraint function is used or not. Function settings are
individually set for phase, ground and negative sequence inrush current.
[FUNCTION – 2 WAY(CB)]
>Phase:
ENABLE
Ground:
ENABLE
Neg Seq':
ENABLE
[ DISABLE/ENABLE ]
▲▼Move, ■Select, ●Return
[ LCD Screen ] Inrush Restraint Function Menu Screen
1) Phase
Range
DISABLE, ENABLE
Default
ENABLE
Step
-
n Sets whether the inrush restraint function is applied to phase current.
2) Ground
Range
DISABLE, ENABLE
Default
ENABLE
Step
-
n Sets whether the inrush restraint function is applied to ground current.
3) Neg Seq’
Range
DISABLE, ENABLE
Default
ENABLE
Step
-
n Sets whether the inrush restraint function is applied to negative
sequence current.
230
Multi-Way Switchgear Controller ETR606
B. Pickup Current
The fault pickup level of time delay overcurrent is raised to the value of Inrush
pickup current during Inrush restraint duration. Set the pickup level to increase
from this menu, and the setting value should be greater than the time delay
overcurrent pickup value.
[Pickup Current – 2 WAY]
>Phase:
2000
Ground:
2000
Neg Seq':
2000
[ 5~20000:1 A ]
▲▼Move, ■Select, ●Return
[ LCD Screen ] Inrush Restraint Pickup Current Menu Screen
1) Phase
Range
5~20000
Default
2000
Step
1A
n Phase fault current level is configured during inrush current restraint
duration. If the phase current is greater than the setring value, the
phase overcurrent element is activated.
2) Ground
Range
5~20000
Default
2000
Step
1A
n Ground fault level is configured during the inrush current restraint
duration. If the ground current is greater than the setting value, the
ground overcurrent element is activated.
3) Neg Seq’
Range
5~20000
Default
2000
Step
1A
n Negative Sequence fault level is configured during the inrush current
restraint duration. If the negative sequence current is greater than the
setting value, the negative sequence overcurrent element is activated.
231
Multi-Way Switchgear Controller ETR606
C. Restore Minimum Time
Set the restore minimum time of inrush restraint duration from this menu.
[Restore Min. Time – 2 WAY]
>P-Function:
ENABLE
G-Function:
ENABLE
Q-Function:
ENABLE
RMT TIME:
0.60
[DISABLE/ENABLE]
▲▼Move, ■Select, ●Return
[ LCD Screen ] Inrush Restore Minimum Time Menu Screen
1) P-Function
Range
DISABLE, ENABLE
Default
ENABLE
Step
-
n Set whether to apply restore minimum time for phase inrush current.
2) G-Function
Range
DISABLE, ENABLE
Default
ENABLE
Step
-
n Set whether to apply restore minimum time for ground inrush current.
3) Q-Function
Range
DISABLE, ENABLE
Default
ENABLE
Step
-
n Set whether to apply restore minimum time for negative sequence
inrush current.
NOTE )
Depending on the above settings, the inrush current restraint duration
release condition will be different. If it sets to EANBLE, the restore
minimum time is applied and regardless of current size, the inrush current
restraint duration is released after a restore minimum time.
On the other hand, if it sets to DISABLE, the restore minimum time is not
applied and the current size should fall below the reset current, and the
inrush current restraint duration is released.
232
Multi-Way Switchgear Controller ETR606
4) RMT Time
Range
0.01~600.00s
Default
0.60s
Step
0.01
n Select the restore minimum time required for the inrush restraint
function.
n Inrush restraint duration is cancelled after this set time.
n The Restore Minimum Time have to raised pickup levels for time
overcurrent detection from inrush duration fault pickup current back to
nominal pickup level.
D. Inrush Restraint Reset
Set the reset current value to cancel the inrush restraint duration from this
menu.
[INRUSH RES＇RESET – 2 WAY]
>P-Reset I:
500
G-Reset I:
250
Q-Reset I:
500
Reset Time:
0.60
[5~1600:1 A]
▲▼Move, ■Select, ●Return
[ LCD Screen ] Inrush Restraint Reset Menu Screen
1) P-Reset I
Range
5~1600A
Default
500A
Step
1A
n Set the level of reset current for phase inrush restraint.
n Inrush current that is lower than this reset current setting level, is
kept for the reset time, Inrush current restraint algorithm is stopped
and normal over current protection function operates.
233
Multi-Way Switchgear Controller ETR606
2) G-Reset I
Range
5~1600A
Default
250A
Step
1A
n Set the level of reset current for ground inrush restraint.
3) Q-Reset I
Range
5~1600A
Default
500A
Step
1A
n Set the level of reset current for negative sequence inrush restraint.
4) Reset Time
Range
0.01 ~ 600.00 sec
Default
0.60 sec
Step
0.01 sec
n Sets the time to reset inrush current restraint duration.
E. Phase Curve
T-C curve, which is applied to the phase overcurrent element during the inrush
restraint duration, can be set from this menu. This curve is applied if a phase
fault current greater than the above inrush pickup current occurs during the
inrush restraint duration.
[PHASE CURVE – 2 WAY(CB)]
>Curve:
[ US-VI]
Time Dial:
1.00
Time Add.:
0.00
M.R.T:
0.00
Reset Method:
INST
[curves : total 62]
▲▼Move, ■Select, ●Return
[ LCD Screen ] Inrush Phase Curve Menu Screen
234
Multi-Way Switchgear Controller ETR606
1) Curve
Range
A(101), B(117), ..., DEF-10S (Total 62 curves)
Default
US-VI
Step
-
n Set the type of the applied T-C curve if a phase fault current occurs
during inrush restraint duration.
n Refer to following “[Table 8-1] ETR606's time-current operation
characteristic curve setting range” for applied curve range.
2) Time Dial
Range
0.01~25.00
Default
1.00
Step
0.01
n Set time dial, multiplying this value to selected T-C curve. Multiplying
this value changes the slope of the curve.
3) Time Add.
Range
0.00~600.00 s
Default
0.00 s
Step
0.01 s
n Set Time adder to add set value on selected T-C curve.
4) M.R.T
Range
0.00~10.00 s
Default
0.00 s
Step
0.01 s
n T-C curve trip operation is faster than trip time, this set value is
added to T-C curve for more delay. This function can be useful for
other protective device and line fuse coordination.
5) Reset Method
Range
INST, LINEAR
Default
INST
Step
-
n In case that a fault current is decreased under pickup level, phase
time delay overcurrent protection is reset.
235
Multi-Way Switchgear Controller ETR606
n INST : After 1 cycle, Reset.
n LINEAR : Reset when the fault value is reached at selected curve’s
RT (Reset characteristic constant) value.
F. Ground Curve
T-C curve, which is applied to the ground overcurrent element during the inrush
restraint duration, can be set from this menu. This curve is applied if a ground
fault current greater than the above inrush pickup current occurs during the
inrush restraint duration.
The setting items of this menu are the same as Phase Curve menu. Please refer
to the above phase curve menu for the details.
G. Neg Seq’ Curve
T-C curve, which is applied to the negative sequence overcurrent element during
the inrush restraint duration, can be set from this menu. This curve is applied if
a negative sequence fault current greater than the above inrush pickup current
occurs during the inrush restraint duration.
The setting items of this menu are the same as Phase Curve menu. Please refer
to the above phase curve menu for the details.
H. Others
Set the other items for inrush restraint function from this menu.
[OTHERS – 2 WAY(CB)]
>Outage Time:
5.00
Make Use ‘I’:
NO
[0.01~600.00:0.01 s]
▲▼Move, ■Select, ●Return
[ LCD Screen ] Inrush Restraint Other Menu Screen
236
Multi-Way Switchgear Controller ETR606
1) Outage Time
Range
0.01 ~ 600.00 sec
Default
5.00 sec
Step
0.01 sec
n Set the outage time. After the outage condition is maintained for more
than the setting time, the restoration of load supply becomes active
and
the Inrush current restraint duration becomes active.
n Outage conditions are as follows;
- If "Make Use 'I'" setting is NO, it is considered to be outage when
switchgear’s circuit breaker status is open.
- If "Make Use 'I'" setting is YES, it is considered to be outage when
current is below 2A.
2) Make Use 'I'
Range
NO, YES
Default
NO
Step
-
n Set whetherer or not to use current as decision condition for operating
function.
n When it set to YES, when the current increases above 2A, the inrush
current restraint duration is active.
n When it sets to NO, the inrush current restraint duration becomes active
when switchgear’s circuit breakeris changed from open to close status.
237
Multi-Way Switchgear Controller ETR606
(9) Direction
It moves to this menu if [ENT] key is pressed after locating cursor in
“DIRECTION” in Protection menu. At this menu, set the directional control
function for protection operation.
The "Direction" menu of way of switchgear’s switch(S/W) part and circuit
breaker(C/B) part consists of setting items. Refer to "8.1.1.1.(5) DIRECTION".
(10) Voltage
The ETR606 supports an under voltage and over voltage protection function that
can be accessed on the “VOLTAGE” menu at the Protection Menu. The under
and over voltage settings are described below.
[VOLTAGE – 2 WAY(CB)]
>1.Under Voltage
2.Over Voltage
▲▼Move, ■Select, ●Return
[ LCD Screen ] Voltage Menu Screen
A. Under Voltage
In case that nominal voltage is kept below a certain voltage for a certain time,
under voltage (27) element makes a trip or alarm operation.
The under voltage element is set in the C/B type group setting. It is available to
select a number of phase to be checked for under voltage function. Moreover,
when the fault trip is caused by the under voltage element, the auto reclosing
function will not be worked, and it will be locked out immediately.
The under voltage element is enabled in the C/B type group settings and
PROTECTION ENABLED in user interface panel.
[UNDER VOLTAGE – 2 WAY]
>Function:
DISABLE
Pickup:
0.80
Time Delay:
5.00
Min.Volt:
0.10
Voltage Type:
1P
[DISABLE/TRIP/TR&AL/ALARM]
▲▼Move, ■Select, ●Return
[ LCD Screen ] Under Voltage Menu Screen
238
Multi-Way Switchgear Controller ETR606
1) Function
Range
DISABLE, TRIP, TR&AL, ALARM
Default
DISABLE
Step
-
n Set the function of under voltage element as enable or disable.
n DISABLE : The feature is not operational.
n TRIP : The feature is operational. When the feature asserts a trip
condition, the device trips.
n ALARM : The feature is operational. When the feature asserts a alarm
condition, the device gives the alarm.
n TR&AL(Trip & Alarm) : The feature is operational. When the feature
asserts a trip and alarm condition, the device trips and gives the alarm.
2) Pickup
Range
0.10 ~ 1.40 xVT
Default
0.80 xVT
Step
0.01 xVT
n Set the pickup value of the under voltage element
n This setting is applied with multiple of rated voltage. If the set value
is 0.80xVT and the rated voltage is 13.2kV (phase to neutral), the
pickup value is 10.56kV (= 13.2kV * 0.80).
3) Time Delay
Range
0.00 ~ 600.00 sec
Default
5.00 sec
Step
0.01 sec
n Set the time delay to operate the under voltage element
n If the duration of the phase voltage below the pickup level exceeds
the time delay setting, the under voltage element will operate.
4) Min. Voltage
Range
0.00 ~ 1.40 xVT
Default
0.10 xVT
Step
0.01 xVT
n Set the minimum voltage to activate this element
n This setting is the ratio of the rated voltage.
239
Multi-Way Switchgear Controller ETR606
5) Voltage Type
Range
1P, 2P, 3P
Default
1P
Step
-
n Set a number of phase to be detected for under voltage.
n 1P : More than 1 phase is detected with less than pickup voltage.
n 2P : More than 2 phases are detected with less than pickup voltage.
n 3P : More than 3 phases are detected with less than pickup voltage.
B. Over Voltage
In case that nominal voltage is kept higher than a certain voltage for a certain
time, over voltage element makes a trip or alarm operation. Over voltage element
is set in C/B type group setting. Phase over voltage (59) element is available to
select a number of phase to be checked for over voltage function. Moreover,
when the fault trip is caused by the over voltage element, the auto reclosing
function will not be worked, and it will be locked out immediately.
The over voltage element are enabled in the C/B type group settings and
PROTECTION ENABLED in user interface panel.
[OVER VOLTAGE – 2 WAY]
>Function:
DISABLE
Pickup:
1.10
Time Delay:
5.00
Voltage Type:
1P
[DISABLE/TRIP/TR&AL/ALARM]
▲▼Move, ■Select, ●Return
[ LCD Screen ] Over Voltage Menu Screen
1) Function
Range
DISABLE, TRIP, TR&AL, ALARM
Default
TRIP
Step
-
n Set the function of over voltage element as enable or disable.
n DISABLE : The feature is not operational.
n TRIP : The feature is operational. When the feature asserts a trip
condition, the device trips.
n ALARM : The feature is operational. When the feature asserts a alarm
240
Multi-Way Switchgear Controller ETR606
condition, the device gives the alarm.
n TR&AL(Trip & Alarm) : The feature is operational. When the feature
asserts a trip and alarm condition, the device trips and gives the alarm.
2) Pickup
Range
0.10 ~ 1.40 xVT
Default
1.10 xVT
Step
0.01 xVT
n Set the pickup value of the over voltage element
n This setting is applied with multiple of rated voltage. If the set value
is 1.10xVT and the rated voltage is 13.2kV (phase to neutral), the
pickup value is 14.52kV (= 13.2kV * 1.10).
3) Time Delay
Range
0.00 ~ 600.00 sec
Default
5.00 sec
Step
0.01 sec
n Set the time delay to operate the over voltage element
n If the duration of the phase voltage above the pickup level exceeds
the time delay setting, the over voltage element will operate.
4) Voltage Type
Range
1P, 2P, 3P
Default
1P
Step
-
n Set a number of phase to be detected for over voltage.
n 1P : More than 1 phase is detected with more than pickup voltage.
n 2P : More than 2 phases are detected with more than pickup voltage.
n 3P : More than 3 phases are detected with more than pickup voltage.
241
Multi-Way Switchgear Controller ETR606
(11) Frequency
The ETR606 supports an under frequency and over frequency protection function
that can be accessed on the “FREQUENCY” menu at the Protection Menu. The
under and over frequency settings are described below.
[FREQUNECY – 2 WAY(CB)]
>1.Under Frequency
2.Over Frequency
▲▼Move, ■Select, ●Return
[ LCD Screen ] Frequency Menu Screen
A. Under Frequency
The under frequency element is activated to trip or alarm when the distribution
system frequency drops below a specified frequency pickup for a specified time.
The power system frequency is measured from the zero crossing on the VA-N
voltage input for Wye connected VTs and VA-B voltage for Delta connected
VTs.
The under frequency minimum voltage and under frequency minimum current are
used to prevent incorrect operation when the switch is closed by a local/remote
control. Moreover, when the fault trip is caused by the under frequency element,
the auto reclosing function will not be worked, and it will be locked out
immediately.
The under frequency element is enabled in the C/B type group settings and
PROTECTION ENABLED in user interface panel.
[UNDER FREQUENCY – 2 WAY]
>Function:
DISABLE
Pickup:
58.5
Time Delay:
2.00
Reset Time:
2.00
Min.Volt:
0.10
Min.I:
60
Source Frequency:
1-WAY
[DISABLE/TRIP/TR&AL/ALARM]
▲▼Move, ■Select, ●Return
[ LCD Screen ] Under Frequency Menu Screen
242
Multi-Way Switchgear Controller ETR606
1) Function
Range
DISABLE, TRIP, TR&AL, ALARM
Default
TRIP
Step
-
n Set the function of under frequency element as enable or disable.
n DISABLE : The feature is not operational.
n TRIP : The feature is operational. When the feature asserts a trip
condition, the device trips.
n ALARM : The feature is operational. When the feature asserts a alarm
condition, the device gives the alarm.
n TR&AL(Trip & Alarm) : The feature is operational. When the feature
asserts a trip and alarm condition, the device trips and gives the alarm.
2) Pickup
Range
45.00 ~ 65.00 Hz
Default
58.50 Hz
Step
0.01 Hz
n Set the pickup value of the under frequency element
3) Time Delay
Range
0.00 ~ 600.00 sec
Default
2.00 sec
Step
0.01 sec
n Set the time delay to operate the under frequency element
n If the duration of the frequency below the pickup level exceeds the
time delay setting, the under frequency element will operate.
4) Reset Time
Range
0.00 ~ 600.00 sec
Default
2.00 sec
Step
0.01 sec
n Set the time to reset the under frequency element
243
Multi-Way Switchgear Controller ETR606
5) Min. Volt
Range
0.10 ~ 1.40 xVT
Default
0.10 xVT
Step
0.01 xVT
n Set the minimum voltage required to allow the under frequency
element to operate
n The under frequency element will operate if the voltage of the setting
circuit is greater than the Min. Volt setting value
n This setting is the ratio of the rated voltage.
6) Min. I
Range
OFF(0), 1 ~ 630 A
Default
60 A
Step
1 A
n Set the minimum current value required for any phase to allow the
under frequency element to operate
n The under frequency element will operate if the current that is flowing
in the setting circuit is greater than the Min. I setting value.
7) Source Frequency
Range
1-WAY, 4-WAY
Default
1-WAY
Step
-
n Set the frequency source for the under frequency element
n The source frequency setting in the under frequency element of the
setting circuit, can be selected between 1-Way frequency or 4-Way
frequency.
244
Multi-Way Switchgear Controller ETR606
B. Over Frequency
In case that over frequency is kept higher than a certain frequency for a certain
time, over frequency element makes a trip or alarm operation. The power system
frequency is measured from the zero crossing on the VA-N voltage input for
Wye connected VTs and VA-B voltage for Delta connected VTs.
Over frequency minimum voltage and minimum current is used to prevent
incorrect operation when switch is closed locally or remotely.
Moreover, when the fault trip is caused by the over frequency element, the auto
recloseing function will not be worked, and it will be locked out immediately.
The over frequency element is enabled in the C/B type group settings and
PROTECTION ENABLED in user interface panel.
[OVER FREQUENCY – 2 WAY]
>Function:
DISABLE
Pickup:
62.5
Time Delay:
2.00
Reset Time:
2.00
Min.Volt:
0.10
Min.I:
60
Source Frequency:
1-WAY
[DISABLE/TRIP/TR&AL/ALARM]
▲▼Move, ■Select, ●Return
[ LCD Screen ] Over Frequency Menu Screen
1) Function
Range
DISABLE, TRIP, TR&AL, ALARM
Default
TRIP
Step
-
n Set the function of over frequency element as enable or disable.
n DISABLE : The feature is not operational.
n TRIP : The feature is operational. When the feature asserts a trip
condition, the device trips.
n ALARM : The feature is operational. When the feature asserts a alarm
condition, the device gives the alarm.
n TR&AL(Trip & Alarm) : The feature is operational. When the feature
asserts a trip and alarm condition, the device trips and gives the alarm.
245
Multi-Way Switchgear Controller ETR606
2) Pickup
Range
45.00 ~ 65.00 Hz
Default
62.50 Hz
Step
0.01 Hz
n Set the pickup value of the over frequency element
3) Time Delay
Range
0.00 ~ 600.00 sec
Default
2.00 sec
Step
0.01 sec
n Set the time delay to operate the over frequency element
n If the duration of the frequency above the pickup level exceeds the
time delay setting, the over frequency element will operate.
4) Reset Time
Range
0.00 ~ 600.00 sec
Default
2.00 sec
Step
0.01 sec
n Set the time to reset the over frequency element
5) Min. Volt
Range
0.10 ~ 1.40 xVT
Default
0.10 xVT
Step
0.01 xVT
n Set the minimum voltage required to allow the over frequency element
to operate
n The over frequency element will operate if the voltage of the setting
circuit is greater than the Min. Volt setting value
n This setting is the ratio of the rated voltage.
246
Multi-Way Switchgear Controller ETR606
6) Min. I
Range
OFF(0), 1 ~ 630 A
Default
60 A
Step
1 A
n Set the minimum current value required for any phase to allow the
over frequency element to operate
n The over frequency element will operate if the current that is flowing
in the setting circuit is greater than the Min. I setting value.
7) Source Frequency
Range
1-WAY, 4-WAY
Default
1-WAY
Step
-
n Set the frequency source for the over frequency element
n The source frequency setting in the over frequency element of the
setting circuit, can be selected between 1-Way frequency or 4-Way
frequency.
247
Multi-Way Switchgear Controller ETR606
(12) User Curve
The ETR606 supports 4 user-defined curves for user to implement their own
curve according to their requirement. The user can define the aforementioned
characteristic constant of trip operation time and reset time equation in 4
user-defined curves.
In order to set the user-defined curves, press the [ENT] key after locating the
cursor
in
“USER
CURVE”
in
Protection
menu.
The
setting
items
user-defined curves (User Curve 1-4) are the same as shown below.
[USER CURVE – 2 WAY(CB)]
>1.USER CURVE1
2.USER CURVE2
3.USER CURVE3
4.USER CURVE4
[USER CURVE 1 – 2 WAY(CB)]
>Factor a:
59.5000
Factor b:
2.0200
Factor r:
1.8000
Factor rt:
59.5000
▲▼Move, ■Select, ●Return
[0~150.9998:0.0001]
▲▼Move, ■Select, ●Return
[ LCD Screen ]User Curve Menu Screen
1) Factor a
Range
0.0000~150.9998
Default
59.5000
Step
0.0001
n User defined curve factor α.
2) Factor b
Range
0.0001~150.9998
Default
2.0000
Step
0.0001
n User defined curve factor β.
3) Factor c
Range
0.0001~150.9998
Default
1.8000
Step
0.0001
n User defined curve factor γ.
248
of
4
Multi-Way Switchgear Controller ETR606
4) Factor rt
Range
0.0000~150.9998
Default
59.5000
Step
0.0001
n User defined curve factor rt.
(13) FI Auto Reset
It moves to this menu if [ENT] key is pressed after locating cursor in “FI AUTO
RESET” in Protection menu.
[FI AUTO RESET – 2 WAY]
>F.I Reset:
AUTO
[ AUTO/MANUAL ]
▲▼Move, ■Select, ●Return
[ LCD Screen ] FI Auto Reset Menu Screen
1) F. I Reset
Range
AUTO, MANUAL
Default
AUTO
Step
-
n Select the type of fault target.
n AUTO : When the switchgear’s controller returns to Sequence Reset
(79 Reset) or does manual close operation on Sequence Lockout (79
Lockout), the fault target is automatically reset.
n MANUAL : Fault target status is maintained until “Target Reset”
command on local and remote control.
249
Multi-Way Switchgear Controller ETR606
8.1.2.2. MONITORING
Place the curser on “MONITERING” in Primary/Alternate menu, press [ENT]
button to move into this menu. The functions to monitor the distribution line and
the device body status can be set from this menu.
The "Monitoring" menu of way of switchgear’s switch(S/W) part and circuit
breaker(C/B) part consists of setting items. Refer to "8.1.1.2. MONITORING".
[MONITORING – 2 WAY(CB)]
>1.Live Line
2.Phase Difference
3.Open Phase
4.Operation Count
5.Contact Wear
▲▼Move, ■Select, ●Return
[ LCD Screen ] Monitoring Setting Menu Screen
8.1.2.3. SAVE SETTINGS
From this menu, you can save the changed setting values of the GROUP SETTINGS
menu for Circiut Breaker(C/B) type. The procedure for storing the set value is
described in “6.7. Setting Save”.
250
Multi-Way Switchgear Controller ETR606
8.2. Circuit Event Recorder – Load & Energy Event
ETR606 has the function of periodically record the load and energy measurement
data for each way of switchgear. The user can configure the data field to record
in the Load & Energy event. For the data field configuration method, please refer
to “8.2.1. Load & Energy Field Configuration”.
Load & Energy events are recorded in three ways: minute average, maximum
value per hour, and maximum value per day. However, if the ‘L&E Record’
setting in the “MAIN MENU (COM)/ GLOBAL SETTINGS/ GENERAL/ EVENT
RECORDER” menu is OFF, Load & Energy events will not be recorded.
[EVENT – 1 WAY(CB)]
>1.Load&Energy/Min
2.Load&Energy/Hour
3.Load&Energy/Day
4.Clear Saved Data
▲▼Move, ■Select, ●Return
[ LCD Screen ] Event Settings Menu Screen
8.2.1. Load & Energy Field Configuration
Operator can easily configure fields recorded in Load & Energy Event through
“Load & Energy Field Config Edit” window of ETIMS Interface Software. Load &
Energy Field Configuration procedure is as follow:
1) Click “SETTING / LOAD & ENERGY FIELD CONFIG” to open ‘Load & Energy
Field Config Edit’.
2) In the ‘Load & Energy Field Config Edit’ window, configure fields recorded in
Load & Energy Events. The number of selected field is between 4 and 20
fields.
3) After completing the configuration, click the [Apply] button.
4) While ‘ONLINE’ communication status between Interface Software and ETR606,
upload the changed load profile field configuration in ETR606 using “ONLINE /
UPLOAD / LOAD & ENERGY FIELD CONFIG” menu.
251
Multi-Way Switchgear Controller ETR606
<Figure 8-16> Load & Energy Event Field Config Edit Window
Detailed discription of Field item is as follows;
Ia [A] : Demand Current of Phse A
Ib [A] : Demand Current of Phse B
Ic [A]
: Demand Current of Phse C
Ig [A] : Demand Ground Current
Va [V] : Phase A Voltage in Source Side
Vb [V] : Phase B Voltage in Source Side
Vc [V] : Phase C Voltage in Source Side
Real P’A [kW]
Real P’B [kW]
: Demand Active Power of Phse A
: Demand Active Power of Phse B
Real P’C [kW]
: Demand Active Power of Phse C
Real P’3P [kW]
React P’A [kW]
: Demand Active Power of Phse Three-phase
: Demand Reactive Power of Phse A
React P’B [kW]
React P’C [kW]
: Demand Reactive Power of Phse B
: Demand Reactive Power of Phse C
React P’3P [kW] : Demand Reactive Power of Phse Three-phase
PF A [%]
: Power Factor of Phse A
PF B [%]
: Power Factor of Phse B
PF C [%] : Power Factor of Phse C
PF 3P [%] : Power Factor of Phse Three-phase
Real P’A(+) [kW]
252
: Demand Active Power of Phse A for Forward direction
Multi-Way Switchgear Controller ETR606
Real P’B(+) [kW]
Real P’C(+) [kW]
: Demand Active Power of Phse B for Forward direction
: Demand Active Power of Phse C for Forward direction
Real P’3P(+) [kW] : Demand Active Power of Phse Three-phase for Forward direction
React P’A(+) [kVar] : Demand Reactive Power of Phse A for Forward direction
React P’B(+) [kVar]
: Demand Reactive Power of Phse B for Forward direction
React P’C(+) [kVar] : Demand Reactive Power of Phse C for Forward direction
React P’3P(+) [kVar] : Demand Reactive Power of Phse Three-phase for Forward direction
Real P’A(-) [kW]
Real P’B(-) [kW]
: Demand Active Power of Phse A for Reverse direction
: Demand Active Power of Phse B for Reverse direction
Real P’C(-) [kW] : Demand Active Power of Phse C for Reverse direction
Real P’3P(-) [kW] : Demand Active Power of Phse Three-phase for Reverse direction
React P’A(-) [kVar]
: Demand Reactive Power of Phse A for Reverse direction
React P’B(-) [kVar]
React P’C(-) [kVar]
: Demand Reactive Power of Phse B for Reverse direction
: Demand Reactive Power of Phse C for Reverse direction
React P’3P(-) [kVar]
Real En’3P [kWh]
: Demand Reactive Power of Phse Three-phase for Reverse direction
: Active Power Energy of Three-phase for Forward direction
React En’3P [kVarh]
: Reactive Power Energy of Three-phase for Forward direction
Real En’3P(-) [kWh] : Active Power Energy of Three-phase for Reverse direction
React En’3P(-) [kVarh] : Reactive Power Energy of Three-phase for For Reverse direction
Freq-1W [Hz]
Freq-4W [Hz]
: Frequency in 1 Way
: Frequency in 4 Way
※. NOTE ) Except related items of energy and frequency, it records the average
value during the Load & Energy event recording interval (L&E Interval
Setting)
253
Multi-Way Switchgear Controller ETR606
8.2.2. Load & Energy/Min Event
Average load and energy value is recorded every period which is set on “MAIN
MENU (COM)/ GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL/ EVENT RECORDER / L&E
Interval”. Maximum 2016 values, it’s about 21 days events can be recorded
based on 15 minutes(default) for the event register period.
To check the average value per minute Load & Energy events, please move to
“MAIN MENU / EVENT / LOAD&ENERGY/MIN”.
[LOA D&ENE RGY/MIN – 1 WAY]
No.000 1/201 6
(1/4)
[LOA D&ENE RGY/MIN – 1 WAY]
No.000 2/201 6
(1/4)
IA
IB
IC
IG
VA
VB
IA
IB
IC
IG
VA
VB
:
:
:
:
:
:
0
0
0
0
0.00
0.00
A
A
A
A
kV
kV
01/01/202 1 00:15
▲▼Mov e, ●Ret urn, ■Mor e
:
:
:
:
:
:
0
0
0
0
0.00
0.00
A
A
A
A
kV
kV
01/01/202 1 00:00
▲▼Mov e, ●Ret urn, ■Mor e
■
■
[LOA D&ENE RGY/MIN – 1 WAY]
No.000 1/201 6
(4/4)
[LOA D&ENE RGY/MIN – 1 WAY]
No.000 2/201 6
(4/4)
Pf C
Pf 3P
Pf C
Pf 3P
:
:
0.000 %
0.000 %
01/01/202 1 00:15
▲▼Mov e, ●Ret urn, ■Mor e
:
:
0.000 %
0.000 %
01/01/202 1 00:00
▲▼Mov e, ●Ret urn, ■Mor e
[ LCD Screen ] Load & Energy/Min Event Screen
[▼][▲] button is used to check the events. If one Load & Energy event consists
of multiple pages, you can move to the next page by pressing the [ENT] button.
[0001/2016] is the latest event record.
※. NOTE ) Configuration display for Load&Energy/min events may be revised on
user’s request.
Trigger Source
n Demand Current – A, B, C, G
n Demand Voltage – A, B, C
n Demand Active Power - A, B, C, 3ф
n Demand Reactive Power – A, B, C, 3ф
n Demand Power Factor – A, B, C, 3ф
n Energy - Positive Active/Reative(3ф), Negative Active/Reative(3ф)
254
Multi-Way Switchgear Controller ETR606
n Frequency – 1 Way, 4 Way
Trigger Time
Monitors to change Trigger source status every period set on “GLOBAL
SETTING / EVENT RECORDER / L&E Interval”.
Storage Capacity
Stores latest 2,016 events.
8.2.3. Load & Energy/Hour Event
Peak load & Energy event is recorded in every hour. Maximum load in every
hour, is recorded up to 2016 events, it’s about 84 days events are recorded.
Move to “MAIN MENU / EVENT / LOAD&ENERGY/HOUR” to confirm Peak Load
& Energy/Hour events.
[LOA D&ENE RGY/HOU R – 1 WAY]
No.000 1/201 6
(1/4)
[LOA D&ENE RGY/HOU R – 1 WAY]
No.000 2/201 6
(1/4)
IA
IB
IC
IG
VA
VB
IA
IB
IC
IG
VA
VB
:
:
:
:
:
:
0
0
0
0
0.00
0.00
A
A
A
A
kV
kV
01/01/202 1 01H
▲▼Mov e, ●Ret urn, ■Mor e
:
:
:
:
:
:
0
0
0
0
0.00
0.00
A
A
A
A
kV
kV
01/01/202 1 00H
▲▼Mov e, ●Ret urn, ■Mor e
■
■
[LOA D&ENE RGY/HOU R – 1 WAY]
No.000 1/201 6
(4/4)
[LOA D&ENE RGY/HOU R – 1 WAY]
No.000 2/201 6
(4/4)
Pf C
Pf 3P
Pf C
Pf 3P
:
:
0.000 %
0.000 %
01/01/202 1 01H
▲▼Mov e, ●Ret urn, ■Mor e
:
:
0.000 %
0.000 %
01/01/202 1 00H
▲▼Mov e, ●Ret urn, ■Mor e
[ LCD Screen ] Load & Energy/Hour Event Screen
[▼][▲] button is used to check the events. If one Load & Energy event consists
of multiple pages, you can move to the next page by pressing the [ENT] button.
[0001/2016] is the latest event record.
※. NOTE ) Configuration display for Load&Energy/hour events may be revised
on user’s request.
255
Multi-Way Switchgear Controller ETR606
Trigger Source
n Demand Current – A, B, C, G
n Demand Voltage – A, B, C
n Demand Active Power - A, B, C, 3ф
n Demand Reactive Power – A, B, C, 3ф
n Demand Power Factor – A, B, C, 3ф
n Energy - Positive Active/Reative(3ф), Negative Active/Reative(3ф)
n Frequency – 1 Way, 4 Way
Trigger Time
Monitors to change Trigger source status every hour.
Storage Capacity
Stores latest 2,016 events.
8.2.4. Load & Energy/Day Event
Peak load event is recorded in every day. Maximum load in every day, is
recorded up to 2,016 events, it’s 2,016 days events are recorded.
Move to “MAIN MENU / EVENT / LOAD&ENERGY/DAY” to confirm Peak Load
& Energy /day events.
[LOA D&ENE RGY/DAY – 1 WAY]
No.000 1/201 6
(1/4)
[LOA D&ENE RGY/DAY – 1 WAY]
No.000 2/201 6
(1/4)
IA
IB
IC
IG
VA
VB
IA
IB
IC
IG
VA
VB
:
:
:
:
:
:
0
0
0
0
0.00
0.00
A
A
A
A
kV
kV
01/02/202 1
▲▼Mov e, ●Ret urn, ■Mor e
:
:
:
:
:
:
0
0
0
0
0.00
0.00
A
A
A
A
kV
kV
01/01/202 1
▲▼Mov e, ●Ret urn, ■Mor e
■
■
[LOA D&ENE RGY/DAY – 1 WAY]
No.000 1/201 6
(4/4)
[LOA D&ENE RGY/DAY – 1 WAY]
No.000 2/201 6
(4/4)
Pf C
Pf 3P
Pf C
Pf 3P
:
:
0.000 %
0.000 %
01/02/202 1
▲▼Mov e, ●Ret urn, ■Mor e
:
:
0.000 %
0.000 %
01/01/202 1
▲▼Mov e, ●Ret urn, ■Mor e
[ LCD Screen ] Load & Energy/Day Event Screen
256
Multi-Way Switchgear Controller ETR606
[▼][▲] button is used to check the events. If one Load & Energy event consists
of multiple pages, you can move to the next page by pressing the [ENT] button.
[0001/2016] is the latest event record.
※. NOTE ) Configuration display for Load&Energy/day events may be revised on
user’s request.
Trigger Source
n Demand Current – A, B, C, G
n Demand Voltage – A, B, C
n Demand Active Power - A, B, C, 3ф
n Demand Reactive Power – A, B, C, 3ф
n Demand Power Factor – A, B, C, 3ф
n Energy - Positive Active/Reative(3ф), Negative Active/Reative(3ф)
n Frequency – 1 Way, 4 Way
Trigger Time
Monitors to change Trigger source status everyday.
Storage Capacity
Stores latest 2,016 events.
8.2.5. Clear Saved Data
Move to “EVENT / CLEAR SAVED DATA” to clear saved Load & Energy events.
Passcode 3 certification is required to enter “CLEAR SAED DATA” menu. Please
refer to the [Table 7-3] Clear Save Data” of “7.2.7. Clear Saved Data” for the
procedure to clear the saved events.
[CLEAR SAVED DATA – 1 WAY]
>1.Load & Energy
▲▼Move, ■Select, ●Return
[ LCD Screen ] Clear Saved Data Setting Screen
257
Multi-Way Switchgear Controller ETR606
8.3. Maintenance
It moves to the maintenance menu of the [ENT] key is pressed after putting the
cursor
in
"MAINTENANCE"
in
the
main
menu.
This
menu
information of the maintenance for each way of switchgear.
indicates
the
This menu has
submenus as shown below and can move to the chosen submenu by using the
[ENT] key.
[MAINTENANCE – 1 WAY(CB)]
>1.Count
2.Contact Wear
3.Data reset
▲▼Move, ■Select, ●Return
[ LCD Screen ] Maintenance Menu Screen
8.3.1. Count
Counter information of each way is displayed, it has sub-menus as below.
[COUNT – 1 WAY(CB)]
>1.Operation
2.Fault
▲▼Move, ■Select, ●Return
[ LCD Screen ] Count Information Screen
(1) Operation Count
ETR606 registers and monitors the operation count for each circuit when an
open operation occurs. Move to “MAIN MENU / MAINTENANCE / COUNT /
OPERATION” to check the registered operation counts of each way.
[Table 8-2] Operation Count
Main Menu / Maintenance / Count / Operation
Operation Count
[OPERATION – 2 WAY]
operation counter of each way is displayed.
Operation Count :
●Return
258
0
Multi-Way Switchgear Controller ETR606
(2) Fault Count
ETR606 registers and monitors the operation count for each circuit when a fault
occurs. There could be some differences in the managed fault count items
depending on each circuit type (Switch (S/W) type or Circuit Breaker (C/B) type).
Move to “MAIN MENU / MAINTENANCE / COUNT / FAULT” to check the
registered fault counts of each way. This COUNT menu consists 3 pages.
Use
[▼][▲] button to move into sub-menu.
A. Fault Count for Switch(S/W) type
[Table 8-3] Fault Count for Switch type
Main Menu / Maintenance / Count / Fault
[FAULT COUNT – 1 WAY(SW)]
No. 1/4
>> Fault Total Count
+ Permanent
:
0
+ Temporary
:
0
+ FI-Total
:
0
[FAULT COUNT – 1 WAY(SW)]
No. 2/4
>> Fault Indication Count
+ FI-Total
:
0
+ FI-Target A :
0
+ FI-Target B :
0
+ FI-Target C :
0
+ FI-Target G :
0
+ FI-Target Q :
0
[FAULT COUNT – 1 WAY(SW)]
No. 3/4
>> Permanent FI Count
+ Total
:
0
+ Target A :
0
+ Target B :
0
+ Target C :
0
+ Target G :
0
+ Target Q :
0
▲▼Move, ●Return
▲▼Move, ●Return
▲▼Move, ●Return
[FAULT COUNT – 1 WAY(SW)]
No. 4/4
>> Temporary FI Count
+ Total
:
0
+ Target A :
0
+ Target B :
0
+ Target C :
0
+ Target G :
0
+ Target Q :
0
▲▼Move, ●Return
Fault Total Count (1/4)
The total fault counts for permanent fault, temporary and fault indication are
displayed.
Fault Indication Count (2/4)
The fault indication counts for total and each target are displayed.
Permanent Count (3/4)
The permanent fault counts for total and each target are displayed.
Temporary Count (4/4)
The temporary fault counts for total and each target are displayed.
259
Multi-Way Switchgear Controller ETR606
B. Fault Count for Circuit Breaker(C/B) type
[Table 8-4] Fault Count for Circuit Breaker type
Main Menu / Maintenance / Count / Fault
[FAULT COUNT – 1 WAY(CB)]
No. 1/4
>> Fault Trip Count
+ Fault Trip :
0
+ Inst' Trip :
0
+ U.Volt(27) :
+ O.Volt(59) :
+ U.Freq(81U):
+ O.Freq(81O):
0
0
0
0
▲▼Move, ●Return
Fault Trip and Total Count (1/4)
n Fault Trip : The total count of fault trip
operation is displayed.
n Inst'
Trip
:
The
total
count
of
instantaneous overcurrent trip operation is
displayed.
n U.Volt(27)
:
The
total
count
of
under
of
over
voltage fault(27) is displayed.
[FAULT COUNT – 1 WAY(CB)]
No. 2/4
>> Fault Indication Count
+ FI-Total
:
0
+ FI-Target A :
0
+ FI-Target B :
0
+ FI-Target C :
0
+ FI-Target G :
0
+ FI-Target Q :
0
▲▼Move, ●Return
n O.Volt(59)
:
The
total
count
voltage fault(59) is displayed.
n U.Freq(81U) : The total count of under
frequency fault(81U) is displayed.
n O.Freq(81O) : The total count of over
frequency fault(81O) is displayed.
Fault Indication Count (2/4)
n Total FI Count : The fault indication counts
[FAULT COUNT – 1 WAY(CB)]
No. 3/4
>> Permanent FI Count
+ T:
0 + Q:
0
+ A:
0 + B:
0
+ C:
0 + G:
0
>> Temporary FI Count
+ T:
0 + Q:
+ A:
0 + B:
+ C:
0 + G:
▲▼Move, ●Return
for total and each target are displayed.
Permanent and Temporary FI Count (3/4)
n Permanent FI Count : The permanent fault
counts
0
0
0
for
total
and
each
target
are
displayed.
n Temporary FI Count : The temporary fault
counts
for
total
and
each
target
are
displayed.
[FAULT COUNT – 1 WAY(CB)]
No. 4/4
>> Time OC(51) Fault Count
+ T:
0 + Q:
0
+ A:
0 + B:
0
+ C:
0 + G:
0
>> Inst' OC(50) Fault Count
+ T:
0 + Q:
+ A:
0 + B:
+ C:
0 + G:
▲▼Move, ●Return
Overcurrent Fault Count (4/4)
n Time OC(51) Fault Count : The time delay
overcurrent
counts
target
are
:
The
displayed.
0
0
0
n Inst’
OC(50)
instantaneous
Fault
Count
overcurrent counts for each
target are displayed.
260
for each
Multi-Way Switchgear Controller ETR606
8.3.2. Contact Wear
Move to “MAIN MENU / MAINTENANCE / CONTACT WEAR” menu which
displays the contact wear in percentage for each phase.
[CONTACT WEAR – 1 WAY]
Phase A :
Phase B :
Phase C :
100.00%
100.00%
100.00%
▲▼Move, ■Select, ●Return
[ LCD Screen ] Contact Wear Information Screen
8.3.3. Data Reset
Move to “MAIN MENU / MAINTENANCE / DATA RESET”. This menu resets
COUNT and Maintenance data. Passcode 3 certification is required to enter
“CLEAR SAVED DATA” menu.
[Table 8-5] Data Reset
Main Menu / Maintenance / Data Reset
[DATA RESET – 2 WAY(CB)]
1.Operation Count
2.Fault Count
3.Count All
4.Contact Wear
5.Energy
6.MAX DEMAND
7.Above All
▲▼Move, ■Select, ●Return
[DATA RESET – 2 WAY(CB)]
* CLEAR DATA *
DATA CLEAR SUCCESS
▲▼Move, ■Select, ●Return
261
Saved Data Reset
Select an item to delete and press [ENT]
button.
If
deleting
is
completed,
“DATA
CLEAR SUCCESS” message is displayed.
7. Above All
1 ~ 6 items are all deleted.
Multi-Way Switchgear Controller ETR606
8.4. Status
Move to “MAIN MENU / STATUS” to confirm switchgear’s each way status.
[Table 8-6] Switchgear’s way Status (1/2)
Main Menu / Status
[STATUS – 1 WAY(CB)]
52A Contact Stat':
CLOSE
2-Way Type
:
CB-TYPE
Protection
:
ENABLED
Ground Protection:
ENABLED
Control
:
LOCAL
Control Handle
:
UNLOCK
Earth Status
:
OPEN
Mechanism Status :
FREE
Close Block Stat':
NORMAL
Close Operation :
NORMAL
Trip Operation :
NORMAL
▲▼Move, ●Return
Present switchgear tank and ETR606 status
for each way are displayed. Use
[▼] [▲]
button to check all items.
52A Contact Stat’
It displays switchgear tank stuatus (OPEN,
CLOSE, TROUBLE).
#-Way Type (#: way number)
It displays the way’s control type (CB-TYPE,
SW-TYPE).
Protection
It displays the Protection function(C/B type)
status or Fault Indication function(S/W type)
status (ENABLED, DISABLED).
Ground Protection
It displays the Ground protection function(C/B
type) status or Ground fault Indication function
(S/W type) status (ENABLED, DISABLED).
Control
It displays the operation control selection status
(REMOTE, LOCAL, TROUBLE).
Control Handle
It displays the control lock status (LOCK,
UNLOCK).
262
Multi-Way Switchgear Controller ETR606
[Table 8-6] Switchgear’s way Status (2/2)
Main Menu / Status
[STATUS – 1 WAY(CB)]
52A Contact Stat':
CLOSE
2-Way Type
:
CB-TYPE
Protection
:
ENABLED
Ground Protection:
ENABLED
Control
:
LOCAL
Control Handle
:
UNLOCK
Earth Status
:
OPEN
Mechanism Status :
FREE
Close Block Stat':
NORMAL
Close Operation :
NORMAL
Trip Operation :
NORMAL
▲▼Move, ●Return
Earth Status
It displays the status of the earth circuit
(OPEN, CLOSE).
Mechanism Status
It
displays
the
mechanism
status
of
switchear’s circuit (LOCK, FREE).
Close Block Stat’
It displays the status of close block signal
input from switchear tank (NORMAL, BLOCK).
Close Operation
It displays the closing operation allowable
status (NORMAL, BLOCK).
Trip Operation
It displays the opening operation allowable
status (NORMAL, BLOCK).
263
Multi-Way Switchgear Controller ETR606
8.5. Metering
It moves to the measurement menu if the [ENT] key is pressed after putting the
cursor on "METERING" in the main menu. In the measurement menu, the present
each’s measurement value is indicated and has submenus like shown below. It is
possible to move to the chosen submenu by pressing the [ENT] key.
[METERING – 1 WAY(CB)]
>1.Current
2.Voltage
3.Power
4.Energy
5.Demand
▲▼Move, ■Select, ●Return
[ LCD Screen ] Metering Information Screen
8.5.1. Current
User can confirm current metering value in “MAIN MENU / METERING /
CURRENT”.
[CURRENT – 1 WAY]
IA:
IB:
IC:
IG:
0 A
0 A
0 A
0 A
∠
∠
∠
∠
0 °
0 °
0 °
0 °
I1:
I2:
3I0:
0 A
0 A
0 A
∠
∠
∠
0 °
0 °
0 °
●Return
[ LCD Screen ] Current metering Screen
Following values are contained in the current metering;
n IA : Displays the measured phase A RMS current and phasor (A, deg°)
n IB : Displays the measured phase B RMS current and phasor (A, deg°)
n IC : Displays the measured phase C RMS current and phasor (A, deg°)
n IG : Displays the measured ground RMS current and phasor (A, deg°)
n I1 : Indicates the measured positive sequence current and phasor.(A, deg°)
n I2: Indicates the measured negative sequence current and phasor. (A, deg°)
n 3I0: Indicates the zero sequence current and phasor. (A, deg°)
264
Multi-Way Switchgear Controller ETR606
8.5.2. Voltage
User can confirm voltage metering value in “MAIN MENU / METERING /
VOLTAGE”.
VA:
VB:
VC:
VAB:
VBC:
VCA:
[VOLTAGE – 1 WAY]
0.00 kV
∠
0 °
0.00 kV
∠
0 °
0.00 kV
∠
0 °
0.00 kV
∠
0 °
0.00 kV
∠
0 °
0.00 kV
∠
0 °
V1:
0.00 kV
V2:
0.00 kV
3V0:
0.00 kV
●Return
∠
∠
∠
0 °
0 °
0 °
[ LCD Screen ] Voltage metering Screen
Following values are contained in the voltage metering;
n VA : Displays the measured phase A RMS voltage and phasor (kV, deg°)
n VB : Displays the measured phase B RMS voltage and phasor (kV, deg°)
n VC : Displays the measured phase C RMS voltage and phasor (kV, deg°)
n VAB : Displays the measured A-B RMS voltage and phasor (kV, deg°)
n VBC : Displays the measured B-C RMS voltage and phasor (kV, deg°)
n VCA : Displays the measured C-A RMS voltage and phasor (kV, deg°)
n V1 : Indicates the measured positive sequence voltage and phasor (kV, deg°)
n V2 : Indicates the measured negative sequence voltage and phasor (kV, deg°)
n 3V0 : Indicates the zero sequence voltage and phasor (kV, deg°)
8.5.3. Power
User can confirm power metering value in “MAIN MENU / METERING / POWER”.
A:
B:
C:
3P:
A:
B:
C:
3P:
●Return
[POWER – 1 WAY]
0 kW
0
0 kW
0
0 kW
0
0 kW
0
0 kVA
0 kVA
0 kVA
0 kVA
Pf:
Pf:
Pf:
Pf:
0
0
0
0
kVar
kVar
kVar
kVar
%
%
%
%
[ LCD Screen ] Power metering Screen
265
Multi-Way Switchgear Controller ETR606
Following values are contained in the power metering;
n ACTIVE POWER : Each phase and three phase’s active power displayed (kW).
n REACTIVE POWER : Each phase and three phase’s reactive power displayed
(kVar).
n APPARENT POWER : Each phase and three phase’s apparent power displayed
(kVA).
n POWER FACTOR: Each phase and three phase’s power factor per phase is
displayed (%).
8.5.4. Energy
User can confirm power metering value in “MAIN MENU / METERING / POWER”.
[POSITIVE ENERGY – 1 WAY]
No. 1/2
A :
0 kWh
B :
0 kWh
C :
0 kWh
3P :
0 kWh
A :
0 kVarh
B :
0 kVarh
C :
0 kVarh
3P :
0 kVarh
S/D:08/23/2021
08:46:24
▲▼Move, ●Return
[NEGATIVE ENERGY – 1 WAY]
No. 2/2
A :
0 kWh
B :
0 kWh
C :
0 kWh
3P :
0 kWh
A :
0 kVarh
B :
0 kVarh
C :
0 kVarh
3P :
0 kVarh
S/D:08/23/2021
08:46:24
▲▼Move, ●Return
Energy is displayed Use [▼][▲] button to check the energy metering information.
[ LCD Screen ] Energy metering Screen
Following values are contained in the power metering.
n POSITIVE ENERGY : Each phase and three phase active/reactive power
amount for forward direction are indicated (kWh, kVarh).
n NEGATIVE ENERGY : Each phase and three phase active/reactive power
amount for reverse direction are indicated (kWh, kVarh).
n S/D : The last line “S/D” of each page indicates the time that have started
the present power amount metering. It means, it is the time that has reset in
0 the power by using the “MAIN MENU/ MAINTENANCE/ DATA RESET/
ENERGY” menu.
266
Multi-Way Switchgear Controller ETR606
8.5.5. Demand
User can confirm demand metering value in “MAIN MENU / METERING / DEMAND”.
[DEMAND – 1 WAY]
IA:
IC:
0 A
0 A
A:
B:
C:
3P:
0 Kw
0 Kw
0 Kw
0 Kw
IB:
IG:
No. 1/6
0 A
0 A
0 kVar
0 kVar
0 kVar
0 kVar
[MAX. DEMAND CURRENT – 1W]
No. 2/6
IA:
42 A
08/20/2021 14:38:01
IB:
52 A
08/15/2021 15:35:45
IC:
62 A
08/13/2021 16:15:44
IG:
133 A
08/13/2021 16:15:44
▲▼Move, ●Return
▲▼Move, ●Return
[MAX. (-)ACTIVE POW – 1W]
No. 4/6
PA:
-0 kW
08/18/2021 18:31:25
PB:
-2627 kW
08/09/2021 15:41:56
PC:
-182 kW
08/13/2021 16:28:50
P3:
-2635 kW
08/09/2021 15:41:56
[MAX. (+)ACTIVE POW – 1W]
No. 3/6
PA:
661 kW
08/09/2021 15:41:56
PB:
135 kW
08/09/2021 15:41:56
PC:
526 kW
08/20/2021 14:42:47
P3:
813 kW
08/20/2021 14:42:47
▲▼Move, ●Return
▲▼Move, ●Return
[MAX. (+)REACTIVE POW – 1W]
No. 5/6
PA:
9 kVar
08/09/2021 15:41:56
PB:
4 kVar
08/09/2021 15:41:56
PC:
1098 kVar
08/13/2021 16:28:50
P3:
464 kVar
08/13/2021 16:28:50
[MAX. (-)REACTIVE POW – 1W]
No. 6/6
PA:
-0 kVar
08/11/2021 10:43:42
PB:
-4595 kVar
08/16/2021 13:47:19
PC:
-1 kVar
08/16/2021 13:47:19
P3:
-4594 kVar
08/16/2021 13:47:19
▲▼Move, ●Return
▲▼Move, ●Return
Demand current and power is indicated. Use [▼][▲] key to check the Demand
metering information.
[ LCD Screen ] Demand Metering Screen
267
Multi-Way Switchgear Controller ETR606
ETR606 measures and indicates following Demand current and power items;
n DEMAND
- DEAMDN CURRENT (IA, IB, IC, IG) : Indicates the present measured value
of each phase and ground demand current (A).
- DEAMDN ACTIVE POWER (A, B, C, 3P) : Indicates the present measured
value of each phase and three-phase demand active power (kW).
- DEAMDN REACTIVE POWER (A, B, C, 3P) : Indicates the present measured
value of each phase and three-phase demand reactive power (kVar).
n MAX. DEMAND CURRENT (IA, IB, IC, IG) : Indicates the demand current
maximum value of each phase and ground, and the time that have measured
the maximum value.
n MAX. (+)ACTIVE POW (PA, PB, PC, P3) : Indicates the demand positive
active power maximum value of each phase and three-phase and the time that
have measured the maximum value (kW).
n MAX. (-)ACTIVE POW (PA, PB, PC, P3) : Indicates the demand negative
active power maximum value of each phase and three-phase and the time that
have measured the maximum value (kW).
n MAX. (+)REACTIVE POW (PA, PB, PC, P3) : Indicates the demand positive
reactive power maximum value of each phase and three-phase and the time
that have measured the maximum value (kVar).
n MAX. (-)REACTIVE POW (PA, PB, PC, P3) : Indicates the demand negative
reactive power maximum value of each phase and three-phase and the time
that have measured the maximum value (kVar).
※. NOTE ) The aboive Max. Demand current and power of each phase and
three-phase can be reset by “MAIN MENU/ MAINTENANCE/ DATA
RESET/ MAX DEMAND”
268
menu.
Multi-Way Switchgear Controller ETR606
User can confirm in “MAIN MENU / METERING / DEMAND”.
[DEMAND – 1 WAY]
IA:
IC:
0 A
0 A
A:
B:
C:
3P:
0 Kw
0 Kw
0 Kw
0 Kw
IB:
IG:
No. 1/6
0 A
0 A
0 kVar
0 kVar
0 kVar
0 kVar
[MAX. DEMAND CURRENT – 1W]
No. 2/6
IA:
42 A
08/20/2021 14:38:01
IB:
52 A
08/15/2021 15:35:45
IC:
62 A
08/13/2021 16:15:44
IG:
133 A
08/13/2021 16:15:44
▲▼Move, ●Return
▲▼Move, ●Return
[MAX. (-)ACTIVE POW – 1W]
No. 4/6
PA:
-0 kW
08/18/2021 18:31:25
PB:
-2627 kW
08/09/2021 15:41:56
PC:
-182 kW
08/13/2021 16:28:50
P3:
-2635 kW
08/09/2021 15:41:56
[MAX. (+)ACTIVE POW – 1W]
No. 3/6
PA:
661 kW
08/09/2021 15:41:56
PB:
135 kW
08/09/2021 15:41:56
PC:
526 kW
08/20/2021 14:42:47
P3:
813 kW
08/20/2021 14:42:47
▲▼Move, ●Return
▲▼Move, ●Return
[MAX. (+)REACTIVE POW – 1W]
No. 5/6
PA:
9 kVar
08/09/2021 15:41:56
PB:
4 kVar
08/09/2021 15:41:56
PC:
1098 kVar
08/13/2021 16:28:50
P3:
464 kVar
08/13/2021 16:28:50
[MAX. (-)REACTIVE POW – 1W]
No. 6/6
PA:
-0 kVar
08/11/2021 10:43:42
PB:
-4595 kVar
08/16/2021 13:47:19
PC:
-1 kVar
08/16/2021 13:47:19
P3:
-4594 kVar
08/16/2021 13:47:19
▲▼Move, ●Return
▲▼Move, ●Return
[ LCD Screen ] Demand Information Screen
Use [▼][▲] button to check the demand metering information.
269